2003 CL Online Reference Owner's Manual...

2003 CL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Your Car at a Glance ...........................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your car's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 55 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 121 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 177 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new car, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 191 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 225 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 285 Tips on cleaning and protecting your car. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 293 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 323 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 337 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 341 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

This Owner’s Manual should be considered apermanent part of the car, and should remainwith the car when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Acura 3.2 CL. You may find descriptionsof equipment and features that are not onyour particular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice and withoutincurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Acura, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’s staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. YourAcura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations ! Your selection of a 2003 Acura 3.2 CL was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

－

－－

－－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this car correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

These signal words mean:

on the car.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

A Few Words About Safety

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Your Car at a Glance

2

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

DDRRIIVVIINNGG PPOOSSIITTIIOONNMMEEMMOORRYY

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL

((PP..110000))

((PP..8822))

((PP..8877))((PP..117799)) ((PP..118800))

((PP..113355))

((PP..112222))

((PP..110099))((PP..5577))((PP..9988))

((PP..110044))

Your Car at a Glance

3

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS

HHOORRNN

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

RREEMMOOTTEE AAUUDDIIOO CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

TTIILLTTAADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF SSWWIITTCCHH

((PP..7755))((PP..7733,, 7744))

((PP..6699))

TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL//VVEEHHIICCLLEE SSTTAABBIILLIITTYYAASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM OONN//OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH//CCRRUUIISSEECCOONNTTRROOLL((PP..115599,, 220099,, 221122))

((PP..110077))

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELLBBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS

((PP..7755))((PP..7766))

((PP..115566))

((PP..7722))

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS((PP..7700,, 7722))

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10..........................Head Restraints . 10

..................................Door Locks . 10........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

............................Protecting Adults . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 15....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 17

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

........................Protecting Children . 20All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 20Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 21The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks...........................to Children . 22

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 24

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 24

...Additional Safety Precautions . 24General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 25.......................Protecting Infants . 29

.........Protecting Small Children . 32.......Protecting Larger Children . 36

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 40

.............................Using LATCH . 41Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 43..Seat Belt System Components . 43

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 43Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 44...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 45

Additional Information About...........................Your Airbags . 46

........................SRS Components . 46How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 46...How Your Side Airbags Work . 48

How the SRS Indicator Light.......................................Works . 49

How the Side Airbag Cutoff...........Indicator Light Works . 50

.............................Airbag Service . 51...Additional Safety Precautions . 51

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52...................................Safety Labels . 53

Driver and Passenger Safety


5

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page .)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)9

15

20

228


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Keep Your Car in Safe Condition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

6

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED


Your Car’s Safety Features

7

((55))((77))

((66))

((22))

((11))

((99))

((88))((1100)) ((33))((88))

((22))

((77))((44))((66))

((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonneess((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss((99)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.



Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Your car also has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the car andagainst other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the car.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System with dual-stage,dual-threshold front airbags to helpprotect the heads and chests of thedriver and a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe frontalcollision.

CONTINUED



Airbags do not replace seat belts.

What you should do:

Airbags

9

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Your car’s seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.



Door Locks

Head Restraints

Seats & Seat-Backs What you should do:Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

10

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.Head restraints are properly

adjusted (see page ).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Both doors are closed and locked(see page ).

15

20

13

14

15

12

187


Pre-Drive Safety Checklist


11

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

Your car has a door monitor light onthe instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

After everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

36

82


Protecting Adults

Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.

12

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the car.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)away from the center of the steeringwheel. Also make sure your frontseat passenger moves the seat as farto the rear as possible.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

91


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Front Seats2.

13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

92


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

CONTINUED

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

95


Protecting Adults

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

Adjust the Head Restraints 5.4.

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourAcura dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. Thisspreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

43

Protecting Adults


No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

76

CONTINUED

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety 17

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a car.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car’s airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety18

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbag inflates.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.Do not attach or place objects on

the front airbag covers.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Protecting Adults


Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers. (See page

.)

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section. (See page .)

25

36

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt and use abooster, if needed.

Protecting Children


Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

During acrash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour vehicle crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

Protecting Children


Additional Precautions to Parents

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

21

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, in a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt.

Protecting Children


The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

22

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models Canadian Models

Protecting Children


Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Your car has two seating positions inthe back seat where children can beproperly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thantwo children in your car:

Children who play in cars canaccidentally get trapped inside thetrunk and be seriously injured orcould die. Teach your children notto play in or around cars. Knowhow to operate the emergencytrunk opener (US models only)and decide if your children shouldbe shown how to use this feature(see page ).

17

15

13

36

89

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not leave children alone in yourvehicle.

Lock both doors and the trunkwhen your car is not in use.

Protecting Children


Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box.

29

CONTINUED

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants:

Keep car keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

1.2.

General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Protecting Children


Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

However, Acura is confident that oneor more child seat models can fit andbe properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.

32

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Small Children:

3.

Protecting Children


If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

This page briefly summarizes Acura’srecommendations on where to placerear-facing and forward-facing childseats in your car.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt(see page ).

Recommended positions.Secure a rear-facing child seatwith the seat belt (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Secure a front-facingchild seat with the seat belt (seepage ).

34

30

34

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Small children:

Back SeatsInfants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children


After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to the carwith the lap part of a lap/shoulderbelt. Some child seats can besecured to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system instead. A childwhose seat is not properly securedto the car can be endangered in acrash. See pages , and forinstructions on how to properlysecure child seats in this car.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

30 34 41

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe car.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant is at least one yearold, reaches the seat maker’s weightor height limit, and is able to sit upwithout support.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1. 2.

3.

41

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

A child at least one year old who cansit up without support, and who fitswithin the child seat maker’s weightand height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

13

14

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

Child Seat Type

Protecting Children


Protecting Small Children

32

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

Protecting Children


Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

33

Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1. 2.

3.

41

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild restraint system, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

4. 5.

Protecting Children


When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat on abooster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

We recommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

Protecting Children


Protecting Larger Children

36

Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possible,uses a booster if needed, andwears the seat belt properly.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childsit in the rear seat, all the way backagainst the seat and put on the seatbelt. Follow the instructions on page

. Then check how the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, andthe lap belt rests over the child’shipbones and touches the tops of the

thighs as shown, the child isprobably big enough to wear the seatbelt.

However, if the shoulder belttouches or crosses the child’s neck,or if the lap belt crosses the child’sstomach, the child needs to use abooster seat.

This could result in serious neck andinternal injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

15

CONTINUED

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck or over the stomach.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Protecting Children


The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a high or low-back style that allows the child to bedirectly secured with the lap/shoulder belt.

A child should continue using abooster seat until the child exceedsthe booster seat manufacturer’srequirements.

Even then, the child may still need touse a booster seat. Note that somestates now require children to useboosters until they reach a certainage and/or weight. Be sure to checkcurrent laws in the state or stateswhere you intend to drive.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat

Protecting Children


Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Remind the child not to leantoward the door.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

15 37

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Children


Attach the attaching clip to thetether anchorage point as shown inthe illustration, then tighten thestrap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted.

The tether anchor fittings arelocated under plastic covers. Pivotthe cover backward to access theanchor fitting.

Your car has two tether anchoragepoints under the rear window forsecuring a tether-style child seat tothe car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (Tethers are required inCanada.)

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children


CCOOVVEERR

Your car is equipped with LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) at the outer rear seats.The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The exact location of each loweranchorage is marked with a smallcircle above the lower anchoragepoint.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle or seatbelt tongue away from the loweranchors.

Put the child seat in the rear leftor right vehicle seat and attach thechild seat to the lower anchorsaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

3.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


Using LATCH

41

LLOOWWEERR AANNCCHHOORRAAGGEESS RIGID TYPE

Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

Attach the attaching clip to thetether anchor fitting and tightenthe strap according to the childseat maker’s instructions. Makesure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

4. 5.

6.

Protecting Children


FFLLEEXXIIBBLLEE TTYYPPEE

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all four seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

30 34

CONTINUED

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly. For added protection, the front seat

belts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision that

might not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

15

49

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners



For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Acura provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Acura will repair orreplace any seat belt componentthat fails to function properlyduring normal use. Please seeyourbooklet for details.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .289

Acura Warranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models



Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour car’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, dual-threshold airbags to helpreduce the chance of airbag-causedinjuries.

44

49

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags


The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners



To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your car is equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

How Your Side Airbags Work



If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

The purpose of the SRSindicator light is to alert

you to a potential problem with yourfront airbags. This light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour automatic seat belt tensioners(page ); or your side airbags orpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system (page ).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly. If you see any of these indications,

your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, or your seat belttensioners may not work when youneed them. See your Acura dealer assoon as possible.

44

50

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks



Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),the indicator should light briefly andgo out (see page ). If it doesn’tlight, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

If the side airbag cutoff indicatorlight comes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

If does not mean there is a problemwith your side airbags. It means thatthe side airbag cutoff system hasactivated to prevent the side airbagfrom deploying.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in the front seat, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

61

How the Side Airbag CutoffIndicator Light Works



Your front and side airbag systemsare virtually maintenance-free, andthere are no parts you can safelyservice. However, you must haveyour car serviced if:

Take your car to anauthorized Acura dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit, automatic seat belttensioners and other related parts.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an Acura dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

186

Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting anAcura dealer.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

Your airbags ever inflate.



High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

Your car’s exhaust contains carbonmonoxide gas. You should have noproblem with carbon monoxideentering the car in normal driving ifyou maintain your car properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The car was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside.

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the climate control system asshown below.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Acura dealerfor a replacement.

U.S. models only

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels


RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISOR

HOOD

DASHBOARD

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Acura. All the essential controlsare within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56...............................Indicator Lights . 57

.............................................Gauges . 65...............................Speedometer . 65

.................................Tachometer . 65.....................................Odometer . 66...................................Trip Meter . 66

Outside Temperature...................................Indicator . 67

...................Temperature Gauge . 67..................................Fuel Gauge . 67

Maintenance Required...................................Indicator . 68

Controls Near the Steering.......................................Wheel . 69

...................................Headlights . 70Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 71............Daytime Running Lights . 72

....Instrument Panel Brightness . 72................................Turn Signals . 72

.....................Windshield Wipers . 73..................Windshield Washers . 74

..........................Hazard Warning . 75.............Rear Window Defogger . 75

......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 76...............................Keys and Locks . 78

..............................................Keys . 78....................Immobilizer System . 79

............................Ignition Switch . 80......................Power Door Locks . 82

...................Remote Transmitter . 83...........................................Trunk . 87

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 89....................................Glove Box . 90

......Rear Console Compartment . 90............................Seat Adjustments . 91

.........Driver’s Seat Adjustments . 91...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 93

Front Passenger’s Seat............................Adjustments . 93

........................Rear Seat Access . 94..........................Head Restraints . 95

............................................Armrest . 96.............................................Mirrors . 98

....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 98Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 100..................................Seat Heaters . 103

............................Power Windows . 104.......................................Moonroof . 107

...............................Parking Brake . 108..................................Digital Clock . 109

........................Sunglasses Holder . 110...........................Beverage Holder . 111

.................Console Compartment . 113........................................Coin Box . 113

.............................Console Pocket . 114..................................Storage Tray . 115

......................................Coat Hook . 115........................................Sun Visor . 116

................................Vanity Mirror . 116............Accessory Power Sockets . 117

...............................Interior Lights . 118

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 55

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls56

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

FFUUEELL FFIILLLLDDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMMDDRRIIVVIINNGG PPOOSSIITTIIOONN MMEEMMOORRYY

PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS

MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS(P.100) (P.98) (P.109) (P.122)

(P.82)

(P.87)

(P.179)

(P.180)

(P.135)

(P.104)

＊ The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights


＊＊

＊＊

PPrreemmiiuumm mmooddeell

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREEIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

DDOOOORR AANNDD TTRRUUNNKKOOPPEENN MMOONNIITTOORR

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTTSSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERRSSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AANNTTII--LLOOCCKKBBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLOOWW FFUUEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEEAATT BBEELLTT RREEMMIINNDDEERR LLIIGGHHTT

BBRRAAKKEE LLAAMMPP IINNDDIICCAATTOORR PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDDBBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGGCCUUTTOOFFFF IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

(P.310)(P.63)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P 60)(P.64)

(P.60)

(P.64)

(P 63)

(P.62)

(P.60, 309)

(P.60, 308)

.


Indicator Lights


＊＊

＊＊

TTyyppee--SS wwiitthh AA//TT











HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

VVSSAA AACCTTIIVVAATTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

VVEEHHIICCLLEE SSTTAABBIILLIITTYY AASSSSIISSTTSSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR


(P.310)

(P.60, 308)

(P.60, 309)

(P.62)

(P.63)

(P.62)

(P.64)

(P.63)

(P.60)

(P.64)

(P.81)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.60)


Indicator Lights


＊＊

＊＊

TTyyppee--SS wwiitthh MM//TT











HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR


(P.310)

(P.60, 308)

(P.60, 309)

(P.63)

(P.64)

(P.60)

(P.64)(P.60)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.61)(P.63)

This light has two functions:

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

See page .

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

1.

2.

308

310

312

309

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Seat Belt Reminder Light

Indicator Lights


U.S. Canada

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This light willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff systemor automatic seat belt tensioners.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thecar to your dealer to have it checked.With the light on, your car still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock. For complete information, seepage .208

79

50

159

49

Side Airbag CutoffIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)Indicator

Indicator Lights


U.S. Canada

If this light comes on and stays on atany other time, or it does not comeon when you turn the ignition switchON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Take the car to yourdealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your car still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). See page

for more information on theVSA system.

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the VehicleStability Assist (VSA) system.

This indicator has three functions: This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the TractionControl System.

It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

If it comes on and stays on whenthe Traction Control System is on,it indicates that there is a problemin the TCS.

This light also comes on when youturn the ignition ON (II) and goes offafter the engine starts. See page

for more information on theTCS.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

212

212

212

209

On Premium modelOn Type-S with A/TOn Type-S with A/T

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator

Indicator Lights


This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signalling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the car should flash.

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the trunk or eitherdoor is not closed tightly with theignition switch ON (II).

277

70

72

Canadian models only

High Beam Indicator

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Door and Trunk Open Monitor

Indicator Lights


This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

If a brake light does not work, theindicator comes on

when you push the brake pedal withthe ignition switch ON (II).

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).249

Canadian models only

Low Fuel Indicator

Brake Lamp Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Indicator Lights


BRAKE LAMP

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

Speedometer

Tachometer

Gauges


TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREEGGAAUUGGEE

SSEELLEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

OODDOOMMEETTEERRRREESSEETTBBUUTTTTOONN

FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEERREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR

OOUUTTSSIIDDEE TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREEIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

The trip meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Selectbutton repeatedly. Each trip meterworks independently, so you cankeep track of two different distances.When you turn the ignition switchON (II), what you last selected isdisplayed. To reset a trip meter, display it, and

then press and hold the Reset buttonuntil the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’. Youwill hear a beep. Both trip meterswill reset if the car’s battery goesdead or is disconnected.

Odometer Trip Meter

Gauges



RREESSEETTBBUUTTTTOONN

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.models, and in Centigrade inCanadian models.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

The temperature sensor is located inthe front bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the road sur-face, engine heat, and the exhaustfrom the surrounding traffic. Thiscan cause the temperature readingnot to be correct when your speed isunder 19 mph (30 km/h).

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom mark to about themiddle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to nearthe upper red mark. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

306

Fuel GaugeTemperature GaugeOutside Temperature Indicator

Gauges


Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

－

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance.

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourAcura dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Hold the buttons forapproximately ten seconds untilthe indicator resets.

Press and hold the select and resetbuttons next to the instrument pan-el, then turn the ignition switchON (II).

Turn off the engine.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages .

1.

2.

3.

230 234

Maintenance Required Indicator

Gauges



RREESSEETTBBUUTTTTOONNMMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

＊＊

＊

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The switch for the hazard warninglights is on the dashboard to theright of the steering column.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof, the cruisecontrol, and the VSA/TCS.

To use the horn, press the padaround the ‘‘A’’ logo.

:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel


IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELLBBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT

HHOORRNN

MMOOOONNRROOOOFFSSWWIITTCCHH

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDDWWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGGLLIIGGHHTTSS

TTRRAACCTTIIOONNCCOONNTTRROOLL//VVEEHHIICCLLEESSTTAABBIILLIITTYY AASSSSIISSTTSSYYSSTTEEMM OONN//OOFFFFSSWWIITTCCHH//CCRRUUIISSEECCOONNTTRROOLL

To change between low beams andhigh beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page ).

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the position turns onthe parking lights, taillights, sidemarker lights, and rear license platelights. Turning the switch to the

position turns on theheadlights.

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

63

Headlights



The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

The Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, parkinglights, taillights, side marker lights,license plate lights and instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,open, then close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter ten minutes.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature



Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

The dial on the dashboard to the leftof the instrument panel is used toadjust the brightness of theinstrument panel lights. Turn the dialto adjust the brightness.

Turn SignalsInstrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)



IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELLBBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS DDIIAALL

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLEEVVEERR

The right lever controls the wind-shield wipers and washers. Therotary switch at the end of the leverhas three positions;

INT: intermittent: low speed: high speed

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. In low speed and high speed,the wipers run continuously.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

CONTINUED

Windshield Wipers



To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.

You can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring next to the rotaryswitch.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you’repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

Windshield Washers



The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light in thebutton lights to show the defogger ison. If you do not turn it off, thedefogger will shut itself off afterabout 25 minutes. It also shuts offwhen you turn off the ignition. Youhave to turn it on again when yourestart the car.

Push the red button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and bothindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if your caris disabled.

CONTINUED

Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger



CCaarrss wwiitthh nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemmCCaarrss wwiitthhoouutt nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemm CCaarrss wwiitthhoouutt nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemm

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

17

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Steering Wheel Adjustment



CCaarrss wwiitthh nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemm

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

1.

2.

3.

4.



Your car comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour car:• Ignition• Doors• Trunk pass-through cover• Glove box• Rear console compartment

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk pass-through cover,glove box, and rear consolecompartment locked when you leaveyour car and the valet key at aparking facility.

You should have received a keynumber plate with your keys. Youwill need this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keep

the plate stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use only anAcura-approved key blank.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Keys

Keys and Locks


VVAALLEETT KKEEYY((GGrraayy))

MMAASSTTEERRKKEEYYSS((BBllaacckk))

KKEEYY NNUUMMBBEERR PPLLAATTEE

Your car also comes with two remotetransmitters; see page for anexplanation of the operation.

The Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourcar’s key and the ignition switchwhile trying to start the engine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Acura dealer.

83

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks


The Immobilizer System indicatorwill also blink several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourAcura dealer.

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Ignition Switch

Keys and Locks


－－

－

－

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. The shift levermust also be in Park. The anti-theftlock will lock the steering columnwhen you remove the key.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power sockets.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch fromACCESSORY to ON.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

79

LOCK (0) ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Keys and Locks


Each door has a master door lockswitch. Either switch locks andunlocks both doors. Push the switchdown to lock both doors and up tounlock them.

Each door has a lock tab at the top ofthe door. When you push down thelock tab on the driver’s door, bothdoors lock. Pulling up the lock tab onthe driver’s door only unlocks thatdoor. The lock tab on the passenger’sdoor only locks and unlocks thatdoor.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab down and close the door. To lockthe driver’s door, remove the keyfrom the ignition switch and pushthe lock tab down or push the masterswitch down, then close the door.

Both doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in eitherdoor.

To unlock only the driver’s doorfrom the outside, insert the key inthe driver’s door lock, turn the keyand release it. If you turn the keyand hold it, both doors will unlock.Both doors will unlock when youunlock the passenger’s door with thekey.

Power Door Locks

Keys and Locks


MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH LLOOCCKK TTAABB

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With the driver’s door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver’sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock bothdoors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pushing down thelock tab, the tabs on both doors popup. Pushing down the lock tab on thepassenger’s door only locks that door.

You can lock and unlock your carwith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, bothdoors lock. The parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights and licenseplate light will flash once.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, you willhear a beep to verify that the doorsare locked and the security system

has set.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The passenger’s door unlocks whenyou push the button a second time.The parking lights, side markerlights, taillights and license platelight flash twice each time you pushthe button.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openeither door, the light stays on forabout 10 seconds, then fades out. Ifyou relock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 10 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

CONTINUED

Remote TransmitterLockout Prevention

Keys and Locks


LLEEDD

UUNNLLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

TTRRUUNNKKRREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

PPAANNIICCBBUUTTTTOONN

The remote transmitters will alsoactivate the Driving PositionMemory System (see page ).When you open the driver’s doorafter unlocking it with the remotetransmitter, you will hear a beep.The driver’s seat and outside mirrorsmove to the positions stored in thatmemory location. You will hear twobeeps when the movement iscomplete.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openeither door within 30 seconds, thedoors automatically relock and thesecurity system sets.

You cannot lock the doors with theremote transmitter if either door isnot fully closed or the key is in theignition switch. You cannot unlockthe doors with the key in the ignitionswitch.

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

You can open the trunk with theremote transmitter regardless of theposition of the main switch in theglove box. The trunk will not open ifthe key is in the ignition switch.

The Driving Position MemorySystem will not activate if you leftthe transmission in Reverse or didnot set the parking brake.

The driving position memoryactivated (Memory 1, Memory 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour desired driving position in thememory that is activated by thetransmitter you normally carry.

You can turn off this driving positionmemory activation. While standingnear the car, press and hold theLOCK and UNLOCK buttons at thesame time. The LED in the remotetransmitter will blink twice. Thenrelease the buttons.

100

Type-S with M/TRecalling a Memorized DrivingPosition

Keys and Locks


WWiitthh MMeemmoorryy 11 WWiitthh MMeemmoorryy 22

CONTINUED

Panic mode will not activate if theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your car’s security system toattract attention. When activated, thehorn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash, for about 30 seconds.To activate panic mode, press andhold the PANIC button for about twoseconds.

To turn it back on, repeat thisprocedure. The LED will come onfor one second to indicate thefeature has been turned on.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors, and theLED will not light. Replace thebattery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, place a clothon the edge of the transmitter andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

Replacing the Battery

Panic Mode

Keys and Locks


－




Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your car’s system byyour Acura dealer. Any othertransmitters you have will also needto be reprogrammed.

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same ( sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

Snap the two halves of thetransmitter case back together.

Transmitter Care

Keys and Locks


BBAATTTTEERRYY

You can open the trunk in threeways:

Press the trunk release button onthe driver’s door.

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitterfor approximately one second (seepage ).

Reach through the trunk pass-through and pull the trunk releasehandle.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

83

187

52

CONTINUED

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Keys and Locks


TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Disable the trunk release buttonon the driver’s door by turning offthe trunk main switch in the glovebox.

Lock the glove box with themaster key.

Make sure the trunk pass-throughcover is locked (see page ).

Give the person the valet key.

Even if the trunk main switch isturned off, you can open the trunkwith the remote transmitter.

1.

2.

3.

4.

97

Keys and Locks


TTRRUUNNKK MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

As a safety feature, your car has arelease lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see pages and .24 25

Emergency Trunk Opener

Keys and Locks


U.S. models only

89

EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY TTRRUUNNKK OOPPEENNEERR

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the parking lights are on.

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key. To open the rear console

compartment, pull up on the leverand lift the lid. To close, lower the lidand push it down until it latches.

The rear console compartment canbe locked and unlocked only with themaster key.

The rear console compartment islocated in the center of the rear seat.

Glove Box Rear Console Compartment

Keys and Locks


RREEAARR CCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

GGLLOOVVEEBBOOXX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

－

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom’sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.Push the horizontal switch forward

or backward to move the seatforward or backward.

The long horizontal switch adjuststhe seat bottom in several directions.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat-back angle.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

Your Acura has a power adjustabledriver’s seat. The two power seatadjustment switches are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Thefront passenger’s seat is also power-adjustable.

You can adjust the power seats withthe ignition switch in any position.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

1413

CONTINUED

Driver’s Seat Adjustments

Seat Adjustments


Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move.

The driver’s seat includes a memoryfeature. Two seat positions can bestored in separate memories. Youcan then select a memorized positionby pushing the appropriate memorybutton or using the remotetransmitter. Refer to page forhow to memorize and select seatpositions.

100

Seat Adjustments


－

The seat adjustment switches are onthe outside edge of the seat bottom.Push the long horizontal switchforward or backward to move theseat bottom in that direction.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the vertical switch in thedirection you want to move.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

Vary the lumbar support by movingthe lever on the right side of theseat-back. Move the lever forward orbackward to adjust the lumbarsupport through its full range.

You can adjust the seat with theignition switch in any position.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14

Driver’s Lumbar Support Front Passenger’s SeatAdjustments

Seat Adjustments


To get into the rear seat, open thedoor and pull the release lever up onthe side of the seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward and the entireseat will move forward to alloweasier entry to the rear seat.

After you return the seat-back to theupright position, the seat bottom willautomatically return to its originalposition.

If the seat runs into any obstacle,such as a large package on the floorbetween the front and rear seatswhile it is moving back to its originalposition, the seat will stop and moveforward slightly.

Remove the obstacle, then move theseat to the desired position with theadjustment switch.

To move the driver’s seat, you canselect the memorized position withthe memory button.

Sitting down heavily in the seat as itis moving backward can also causethe seat to react as if it has run intoan obstacle.

Rear Seat Access

Seat Adjustments


RREELLEEAASSEE LLEEVVEERR

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15

The front head restraints helpprotect you and your passenger fromwhiplash and other injuries. They aremost effective when you adjust themso the back of the occupant’s headrests against the center of therestraint. A taller person shouldadjust the restraint as high aspossible. The front head restraints adjust for

height. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. Do not attemptto adjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sidewaysand push the restraint down.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Head Restraints

Seat Adjustments


RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest by movingit forward and backward. Make surethe armrest is securely latched.

The rear seat armrest is located atthe center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

Make sure the passenger’s hands orfingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

Armrest


The pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.

Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .52

Trunk Pass-through Cover

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Armrest


KKNNOOBB

CCOOVVEERR

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the driver’sdoor armrest:

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

1.

2.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors


IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH

AAUUTTOO BBUUTTTTOONN

SSEENNSSOORR

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

WWiitthhoouutt OOnnSSttaarr WWiitthh OOnnSSttaarr


The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

With the selector switch in thecenter (off) position, the passenger’sside mirror will pivot downwardslightly when you shift thetransmission into reverse. This givesyou a better view of that side of thevehicle while parallel parking. Themirror returns to its original positionwhen you take the transmission outof reverse.

4.

3.

100

Mirrors


HHEEAATTEEDD MMIIRRRROORR BBUUTTTTOONNAADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT SSWWIITTCCHH

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).You cannot add a new drivingposition in the memory unless theignition switch is ON (II). You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Store a driving position as explainedin this section only when the car isparked.

Your Acura has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat and outsidemirror positions.

Two seat and outside mirrorpositions, for different drivers ordriving conditions, can be stored inseparate memories. You select amemorized position by pushing theappropriate button or using theappropriate remote transmitter(Memory 1 or Memory 2).

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ). Press and release the MEMO

button on the control panel. Youwill hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator light in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent positions of the driver’sseat and outside mirrors are nowstored.

Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

3.

1.

2.91

98

Storing a Driving Position in Memory

Driving Position Memory System


MMEEMMOO BBUUTTTTOONN

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

The system will move the seat andoutside mirrors to the memorizedpositions. The indicator light in theselected memory button will flashduring movement. When theadjustments are complete, you willhear two beeps and the indicatorlight will remain on.

Readjusting the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

All stored driving positions will belost if your car’s battery goes dead oris disconnected.

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

You can select memorized positionsas follows.

Make sure the parking brake is setand the shift lever is in Park (A/T)or a forward gear (M/T).

You cannot select a memorizedposition if the transmission is inReverse. Shift to another gear,then select.

If the parking brake is not set, youmust press and hold the memorybutton until the adjustment iscomplete.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Notes for Type-S with M/T

Selecting a Memorized Position



MMEEMMOORRYY BBUUTTTTOONNSS

To stop the system’s automatic ad-justment;

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1 or 2.Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.Shift out of Park (A/T) or intoReverse (M/T).Adjust the outside mirrors.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat or outsidemirrors after they are in theirmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator light in the memory buttonwill go out. To keep this drivingposition for later use, you must storeit in the driving position memory.



Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger’s seat-back.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be ON (II) to use them. Pushthe front of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the back of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

With A/T

Seat Heaters


SSEEAATT HHEEAATTEERRSS

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be ON (II) to use them. Pushthe heater switch to turn the poweron or off. The pilot lamp lights andremains on while the heaters are on.

Do not use the seat heaters when theengine is off or when idling for along period of time. They can drainthe battery, making your car hard tostart.

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger’s seat-back.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

Your car’s windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower eitherwindow.

With M/T


Seat Heaters, Power Windows

Power Windows

104

SSEEAATT HHEEAATTEERRSS

－

CONTINUED

The driver’s armrest has a masterpower window control panel. Toopen the passenger’s window, pushdown on the switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pullback on the window switch. Releasethe switch when the window gets tothe position you want.

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

Power Windows


AUTO

105

MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH

DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS WWIINNDDOOWW SSWWIITTCCHH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either door cancels thedelay function. You must turn theignition switch ON (II) again beforeyou can raise or lower the windows.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If the driver’s window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will stop, and thenreverse direction. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passenger’s window. With thisswitch off, the passenger’s windowcannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect the driv-er’s window. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in the carso they do not injure themselves byoperating the window unintentionally.The lights inside the switches comeon when you turn the parking lightsor headlights on.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the driver’s windowfuse is removed, the AUTO functionwill be disabled. The power windowsystem needs to be reset afterreconnecting the battery or installingthe fuse. You should do the following.

Start the engine. Push down onthe driver’s window switch untilthe window is fully open.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourcar checked by an Acura dealer.

Pull back on the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

2.

1.


Power Windows

Auto Reverse

106

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch ( ). Release the switchwhen the moonroof gets to thedesired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

CONTINUED

Moonroof


MMOOOONNRROOOOFF SSWWIITTCCHH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither door. You must then turn theignition ON (II) for the moonroof tooperate.

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased (see page ).

To apply the parking brake, push theparking brake pedal down with yourfoot. To release the parking brake,push on the pedal again. The parkingbrake light on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released with theengine running. (see page .)

60

60

With A/TWith M/T

Moonroof, Parking Brake


Parking Brake

108

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE PPEEDDAALL

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE LLEEVVEERR

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

The digital clock displays the timewith the ignition switch in anyposition.

To set the clock:

Press and hold the H button untilthe hour advances to the desiredtime.

Press and hold the M button untilthe numbers advance to thedesired time.

You can use R to quickly set the timeto the nearest hour. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.For example:

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

1.

2.

3.2 CL without Navigation System

Digital Clock

Parking Brake, Digital Clock


HH MM RRDriving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand axles.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.


Sunglasses Holder

110

PPuusshh

SSUUNNGGLLAASSSSEESS HHOOLLDDEERR

CONTINUED

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

To open the beverage holder, pushon the button. The beverage holderlid is spring-loaded and will swingopen. To close it, push either half ofthe lid closed.

The beverage holder can beremoved. To remove it, grasp theholder in the middle, and pull up thefront. To reinstall it, position theback of the holder, align the fronttabs in the slots, and push down thefront of the holder.

With A/T

Beverage Holder


To open the beverage holder, slidethe lid towards the armrest.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

With M/T

Beverage Holder


To open the console compartment,pull up on the left lever and lift thelid.

To close, lower the lid and push itdown until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theright lever and lift up the armrestpad.

The coin box is located under theaudio system. To open the coin box,pull the bottom edge. Close it with afirm push.

The console compartment lightcomes on only when the parkinglights are on.

Coin BoxConsole Compartment


Console Compartment, Coin Box

113

LLEEVVEERR

CCOOIINN BBOOXXCCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

LLEEVVEERR

To open the console pocket, swingthe upper edge of the lid down.

To remove the pocket, open it, thentake it out of its hinges by lifting itup and out. Do not try to pull thepocket out forcibly. You coulddamage it.

Console Pocket


CCOONNSSOOLLEE PPOOCCKKEETT

The storage tray is located above theaudio system. Push on the center ofthe tray to get it to pop out. Thenremove it by pulling it straight out.

You can put a writing pad, pen, andsmall items in the inner box in thestorage tray. Lift the lid to use thetray.

To use a coat hook, push on the lid.Close it with a firm push.

Make sure the coat hook is closedwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

To reinstall the storage tray into thedashboard, close the lid, then pushthe storage tray in until it latches.


Storage Tray, Coat Hook

Storage Tray Coat Hook


SSTTOORRAAGGEE TTRRAAYY

LLIIDD

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension.

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the car. Do not use thesun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

The lights beside the mirror comeon only when the parking lights areon.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror


EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

Your car has two accessory powersockets. One is located on the frontpanel next to the coin box, and theother is in the console compartment.To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

To open the socket on the frontpanel, pull the cover down.

To use the socket in the consolecompartment, pull the cover up.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

They will not power an automotivetype cigarette lighter element.

Accessory Power Sockets


AACCCCEESSSSOORRYY PPOOWWEERR SSOOCCKKEETT AACCCCEESSSSOORRYY PPOOWWEERR SSOOCCKKEETT

CCOOVVEERR

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight stays on, then fades out inabout 10 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with theremote transmitter (see page ). Ifyou relock the door, the light turnsoff immediately. Otherwise, itremains on, then fades out in about10 seconds.The ceiling light has a three-position

switch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open either door. The lightfades out after both doors are closed.In the ON position, the ceiling lightstays on continuously.

Turn on the spotlights by pushingthe button next to each light. Pushthe button again to turn it off. Youcan use the spotlights at all times.

83


Interior Lights

Ceiling Light Spotlights

118

DDOOOORR AACCTTIIVVAATTEEDD

OONN

OOFFFF

The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when the door is opened,and goes out when the door is closed.

Your car also has a courtesy light inthe ignition switch. This light comeson when you open the driver’s door.It remains on for several secondsafter the door is closed.

Interior Lights


Courtesy Lights

119

...............Climate Control System . 122

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 124

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 125

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 129

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 130Sunlight Sensor/

............Temperature Sensor . 134

................................Audio System . 135.................Operating the Radio . 136.................Adjusting the Sound . 139

............Audio System Lighting . 140....................Radio Frequencies . 140

........................Radio Reception . 140Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 142............Tape Search Functions . 143

Caring for the Cassette.....................................Player . 146

.....Operating the CD Changer . 147..Loading CDs in the Changer . 148

...................................Operation . 150Removing CDs from the

.................................Changer . 152.......Protecting Compact Discs . 154

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 155

...........Remote Audio Controls . 156.......................Theft Protection . 157

............................Security System . 158...............................Cruise Control . 159

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 163

............................................OnStar . 168


3.2 CL with Navigation System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 121

The automatic climate controlsystem in your Acura picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable. Movethe tab in the center of each vent up-and-down and side-to-side.

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

The side vents can be opened andclosed with the dials underneaththem.


Climate Control System

122

OOppeenn

CClloossee

CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTT DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT



PPAASSSSEENNGGEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT

OOppeennCClloossee

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button and set thefan control dial to AUTO, then setthe desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial. You willsee FULL AUTO in the system’sdisplay. The light in the

button also shows you whichmode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, isselected.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.

When the temperature is setbetween the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.



Fully-automatic Operation3.2 CL without Navigation System

124

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREECCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

OOFFFF BBUUTTTTOONNAAUUTTOO BBUUTTTTOONN

FFUULLLL AAUUTTOO DDIISSPPLLAAYY FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLLDDIIAALL

CONTINUED

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL to go out.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator in this button is lit, airfrom the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again(Recirculation mode). When theindicator is off, air is brought in fromoutside the car (Fresh Air mode).

You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.



Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

125

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONNTTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREECCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

You can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.When you turn the dial clockwise,the fan is taken out of automaticmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Turning the dial fullyclockwise increases the fan’s speed,which increases air flow.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the side vents and thedashboard corner vents in all modes.Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected. Press the button four timesto see all the modes.



Fan Control Dial

Mode Button

126

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALLMMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONN


CONTINUED

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.



The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Ifthe fan control dial is in AUTO, thefan speed increases automatically. Ifit is not in AUTO, manually increasethe fan speed or set the dial toAUTO. You can increase air flow tothe windshield by closing the sidevents in the dashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).75



Rear Window Defogger Button

128

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

▲▼

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button. Theindicator in the button will light.Then set the desired temperature bypressing either side of the TEMPbutton: to raise the temperatureabove the displayed value, or tolower the temperature. The light inthe button also shows youwhich mode, Recirculation or FreshAir, is selected.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It does

not regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is setbetween the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.



Fully-automatic Operation3.2 CL with Navigation System

129

OOFFFF BBUUTTTTOONN


TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE BBUUTTTTOONN

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE DDIISSPPLLAAYY


You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remainautomatically controlled. Some ofthese functions appear in theNavigation System display. Press theA/C button next to the display toshow these functions. Making anymanual selection causes theindicator in the AUTO button to goout.

Pressing ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in thedisplay turns the air conditioning onand off. You will see A/C ON or A/COFF activated in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set it below theoutside temperature. With the A/Coff, use the temperature buttons toadjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

Semi-automatic Operation



A/C (Air Conditioning) On/Off Icons

130

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE BBUUTTTTOONN

AA//CC OONN//OOFFFF IICCOONNSS

AA//CC BBUUTTTTOONN


CONTINUED

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator in this button is lit, airfrom the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again(Recirculation mode). When theindicator is off, air is brought in fromoutside the car (Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

You can manually select the fanspeed by pressing any of the fancontrol icons.

Use the MODE icons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents and the side vents in all modes.

Recirculation Button

Fan Control Icons

Mode Icons




FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL IICCOONNSS

MMOODDEE IICCOONNSS

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.


Comfort and Convenience Features132

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically, the systemselects Fresh Air mode, and the fanspeed increases. You can increase airflow to the windshield by closing theside vents in the dashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).75



Rear Window Defogger Button

133

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

DDEEFFRROOSSTTEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor



TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE SSEENNSSOORRSSUUNNLLIIGGHHTT SSEENNSSOORR

＊

＊

Your Acura’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andautoreverse for continuous play.

The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.

147

157

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Audio System


AM/FM/Cassette/CD ChangerAudio System

135

－

－

○ ○

－

－＋

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob, or the AM or FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

TUNE

Operating the Radio

SEEK

SCAN

Audio System


－

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

To store a frequency:

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Audio System


Preset

137

PPWWRR//VVOOLLKKNNOOBB

SSTTEERREEOOIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSSPPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

AAMMBBUUTTTTOONN

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

AUTO SELECT


Audio System

138

SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSS

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBAA..SSEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AA..SSEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

PPRREESSEETTBBUUTTTTOONNSS

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

－

－

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob. The levelindicators on the display show youthe range.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob. The level indicators onthe display show you the range.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

Audio System


Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

139

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBLLEEVVEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Your Acura’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Acura’s radio receivesstations is dependent on manyfactors, such as the distance fromthe station’s transmitter, nearbylarge objects, and atmosphericconditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

72

Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Audio System


Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


▲

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM, FM or CD button. Tochange back to the cassette player,press the TAPE button.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.

Operating the Cassette Player

Audio System


－

CONTINUED

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the REWbutton. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the FF button. You will see FFdisplayed. Press the FF, REW orPLAY button to take the system outof rewind or fast forward. When thesystem reaches the end of the tape,it reverses direction and begins toplay.

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

Audio System


DDOOLLBBYY IINNDDIICCAATTOORRPPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

TTAAPPEE EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYYBBUUTTTTOONN

PPRROOGGBBUUTTTTOONN

DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEEBBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONNFFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

－

○

○

○ ○

－

＋

－＋

The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

To stop the SKIP function before itfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, press either of the SKIPbuttons ( or ).

Audio System


SKIP

144

SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSSRRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.Pressing the REW or FF button, oreither of the SKIP buttons, also turnsoff REPEAT.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Audio System


REPEAT

145

The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ on the display, press theEJECT button to remove thecassette from the unit. Make surethe tape is not damaged. If thecassette will not eject or the errorindication stays on after the cassetteejects, take the car to your Acuradealer.

Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System


CONTINUED

Your Acura’s audio system has an in-dash CD changer that holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.

To load the CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

Audio System


Operating the CD Changer

147

SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSSCCDD BBUUTTTTOONNRRDDMM BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN


CCDD SSLLOOTT

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

Press and hold the Load buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

On the left side of the display, theCD Loaded indicator for an emptyposition will begin blinking.

When LOAd appears again in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the Load buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the Load button, the systemwill wait for ten seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

To load a single CD:

Press and release the Load button.

When the CD Loaded indicator foran empty position starts to blink,and you see LOAd in the display,insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway, thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.When you see LOAd in the display,

insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway, thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will again see the dashesin the display as the CD is loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Audio System


Loading CDs in the Changer

148

CONTINUED

If you press the Load button while aCD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate presetbutton. Select an empty position (theCD Loaded indicator is off), andpress the preset button for thatposition (1 to 6). The system willstop playing the current CD and startthe loading sequence. It will thenplay the CD just loaded.

Audio System


LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

CCDD SSLLOOTTFFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD LLOOAADDEEDDIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

－

－

－

○○

○

○

＋－

＋

－

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘Cd’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate Preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence (see page ).

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either of theSKIP buttons also turns off therepeat feature.

This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate Random Play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset button.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the appropriate SKIPbutton. You will hear a beep and thesystem will continue to move. Pressthe button to move forward, orthe button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

148

Audio System


Operation REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

150

CONTINUED

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM or FM button, or inserta cassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode by pressing the CDbutton, play will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

Audio System


PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSSRRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN RRDDMMBBUUTTTTOONN

RRDDMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RRPPTTIINNDDIICCAATTOORR


AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDDBBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEEBBUUTTTTOONN

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the Eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after tenseconds the system begins playingthe next disc in the changer. If thechanger is empty, the system selectsthe previous mode (AM, FM, orTape).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after ten seconds and beginplaying it.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the Ejectbutton.

Removing CDs from the Changer


Audio System

152

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD SSLLOOTT

If you press the Eject button whilelistening to the radio or tape, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe Eject button again will eject thenext disc in the numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

In any mode, if you press the Ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first. Youcan eject all six discs, one at a time.

Audio System


Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These and contamination fromfingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip penscan cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourAcura dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

Disc-changermalfunction.

High temperature.

Consult your Acura dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System


▲ ▼

Two controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The top and bottom buttons adjustthe volume up ( ) or down ( ).Press the proper button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The AUDIO/CH button has threefunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing acassette or CD.

If you are playing a cassette, use theAUDIO/CH button to advance to thenext selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’blinking in the display when youpress the AUDIO/CH button. Thesystem fast forwards until it senses asilent period, then goes back toPLAY.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push theAUDIO/CH button. You will see thedisc and track number in the display.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe AUDIO/CH button to changestations. Each time you press thisbutton, the system advances to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. You will see thenumber of the selected Preset buttonin the display. To change bands,press the AM or FM button on theaudio system’s front panel.

Remote Audio Controls

Audio System


AAUUDDIIOO//CCHHBBUUTTTTOONN

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

Your car’s audio system will disableitself if it is disconnected fromelectrical power for any reason. Tomake it work again, the user mustenter a specific five-digit code in thePreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourAcura dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the radio fuse isremoved, the audio system willdisable itself. If this happens, youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. If it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

Theft Protection

Audio System


The security system helps to protectyour car and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourcar or remove the radio. This alarmcontinues for two minutes, then thesystem resets. To reset an alarmingsystem before the two minutes haveelapsed, unlock either door with thekey or the remote transmitter.

The security system sets auto-matically fifteen seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and trunk. Forthe system to activate, you must lockthe doors from the outside with thekey, lock tab, door lock switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem light on the driver’s doorstarts blinking immediately to showyou the system is setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening either door (without usingthe key or the remote transmitter),or the hood, will cause it to alarm. Italso alarms if the radio is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release buttonon the driver’s door, the trunkrelease handle behind the trunkpass-through cover, or theemergency trunk opener.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or either door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Trunk OpenMonitor on the instrument panel(see page ), to see if the doorsand trunk are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

63

Security System


SSEECCUURRIITTYY SSYYSSTTEEMM LLIIGGHHTT

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions.

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Cruise Control


Using the Cruise Control

159

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH

WWiitthh AA//TT WWiitthh MM//TT

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The car will acceler-ate. When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your car will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

3.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control


RREESSUUMMEE//aacccceell

SSEETT//ddeecceell

CCAANNCCEELL

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The car will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalwill cause the cruise control tocancel.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/decel button.The car will then maintain thedesired speed.

CONTINUED

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CCAANNCCEELL BBUUTTTTOONN

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISECONTROL light on the instrumentpanel will go out and the car willbegin to slow down. You can use theaccelerator pedal in the normal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RESUME/accelbutton. The CRUISE CONTROLlight comes on, and the car willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Using theCruise Control

Cruise Control


The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your car canbe programmed to operate remotely-controlled devices around your home,such as garage doors, lighting, orhome security systems. It canreplace up to three remotetransmitters.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated by thetransmitter, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver. If you do nothave this information, you shouldcontact the manufacturer of theequipment.

While training or using HomeLink,make sure you have a clear view ofthe garage door or gate, and that noone will be injured by its movement.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device during training.Repeatedly pressing the remotecontrol button could burn out themotor.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour car’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. Garage dooropeners manufactured before thatdate do not have a safety feature thatcauses them to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver


Customer Assistance


General Information

163

－

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Before you can use HomeLink tooperate devices around your home, itmust ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. Forexample, to train HomeLink to openand close the garage door:

If you just tookdelivery of your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red light flashes. Releasethe buttons, then proceed to Step 1.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button onHomeLink at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

2.

3.

4.1.



Training HomeLink Before you begin

164

CONTINUED

Canadian Owners:The remote control you are trainingfrom may stop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enough forHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every two seconds untilHomeLink has learned the code.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinktransceiver button by pushing it. Itshould operate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have a

variable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLinktransceiver button you just trained.If the red light blinks for twoseconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.You may be able to verify this withthe manufacturer’s documentation.Go to ‘‘Training With a RollingCode System.’’

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

5.

6.8.

7.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem



－

－

It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer’s documentationmay help.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 4 seconds.(The same button you trained withthe ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure.)

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 4 seconds.This should turn off the traininglight on the garage door openerunit. (Some systems may requireyou to press the button up to threetimes.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.



TTRRAAIINNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN




To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the car.

To train an already programmedHomeLink button to operate a newdevice:

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, place theremote control for the device 2 to5 inches from HomeLink.

Release both buttons. HomeLinkshould now be trained to operatethe device.

Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.Retraining a Button

Erasing Codes



Press this button to contact anOnStar advisor. You will hear achime, followed by theannouncement, ‘‘Connecting toOnStar.’’ The connection should take20 to 30 seconds. The advisor willassist you with any of the servicesincluded in your plan.

Depending on what service yourequest, you may need to give yourPersonal Identification Number(PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is anumber you make up and providewhen you establish your OnStarservice.

If cellular telephone service is notavailable in the area you are drivingin, you will hear a fast busy signal.The system will retry the connectionseveral times before returning to theready mode.

The OnStar buttons and indicatorare located in the base of the rearview mirror.

The OnStar system in your vehiclegives you access to a wide range ofservices and information with thetouch of a button. An OnStar advisoris available 24 hours a day, 7 days aweek.

Roadside Assistance.Emergency Services.Automatic Notification of AirbagDeployment.Accident Assist.Remote Door Locking/Unlocking.Stolen Vehicle Tracking.Misplaced Vehicle Assistance.Online Concierge Services.

Route Support.Ride Assist.Information and ConvenienceServices.

The Safe & Sound Plan provides:

The Directions & Connections Planprovides these additional features:

Personal Concierge Services.The Luxury & Leisure Plan adds:

OnStar Services ButtonOnStar Control Panel

OnStar


OOnnSSttaarr BBUUTTTTOONN

SSYYSSTTEEMMSSTTAATTUUSS LLIIGGHHTT

EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYYBBUUTTTTOONN

CCAALLLLAANNSSWWEERR//EENNDDBBUUTTTTOONN

－

－

－

－

To cancel these retries, press theCall Answer/End (DOT) button.

A microphone is located in the baseof the rear view mirror so you canspeak to the advisor without takingyour hands off the steering wheel ordiverting your attention from theroad. The OnStar advisor’s voicecomes from the audio system’sspeakers. Use the volume control onthe audio system or on the steeringwheel to adjust the volume.

Press this button to contact anOnStar advisor only if you have anemergency situation. You will hear atone, followed by the announcement,‘‘Connecting to OnStar Emergency.’’Your call is given highest priority.

The advisor will ask about the natureof the emergency, locate yourvehicle, and notify the appropriateemergency service agencies.

Press this ‘‘DOT’’ button to end a callto the OnStar advisor, or to cancelthe call if you should press one ofthe other buttons accidentally. If theOnStar center should call you, pressthis button to answer the call.

This button is also used to initiatethe Personal Calling and VirtualAdvisor services, if you havesubscribed.

This light shows you the status ofthe system.

The system is readyfor use.

A call is inprogress.

There is a problem inthe system. Press the OnStar buttonto contact an advisor. If the callconnects, the advisor will assist youwith verifying the system’s operation.If you are not able to contact anadvisor, take your vehicle to anAcura dealer to have the systemdiagnosed.

There is a problemin the system with a call in progress.

If you press this button accidentally,do not cancel the call. Wait until theOnStar advisor answers, then explainyour mistake.

Emergency Button

Call Answer/End Button

Solid Green

Blinking Green

Solid Red

Blinking Red

System Status Light

OnStar


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The OnStar system uses the GlobalPositioning System (GPS) to locateyour vehicle whenever you place acall. This allows the advisor toquickly contact the nearest serviceswithout requiring you to providedetailed directions.

Contactthe OnStar advisor if you needassistance with a problem (flat tire,out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. Theadvisor will contact an appropriateagency to come and assist you.

Contact anOnStar advisor if you have anemergency situation. The advisorwill contact the nearest emergencyservices provider (ambulance, firedepartment, etc.) and advise them ofyour situation.

If you are ever in anaccident that causes the airbags todeploy, the OnStar systemautomatically places a call (providedthe OnStar system and your vehicle’selectrical system are still intact). Theadvisor will attempt to speak to youto evaluate the situation, and contactthe nearest emergency servicesprovider.

The OnStaradvisor can help you if you are everin a minor accident by asking you forinformation about the accident.Complete, detailed information willmake it easier to complete accidentreports and insurance claims.

By sending a signal to yourvehicle, the advisor can lock orunlock your vehicle’s doors. This ishelpful if you are away from yourvehicle and realize you forgot to lock

the doors, or if you have locked thekeys in your vehicle. To get OnStar’sassistance, call (888) 4-ONSTAR(466-7827).

UsingGPS, OnStar can locate your vehiclealmost anywhere. If your vehicle isever stolen, contact OnStar at (888)4-ONSTAR. The advisor will put youin contact with the proper authorities,and assist them with locating yourvehicle.

If you are unable to locate yourvehicle in a large parking lot orparking structure, contact OnStar at(888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor willremotely activate the exterior lightsand the horn, allowing you to locateyour vehicle.

Roadside Assistance

Emergency Services

Automatic Notif ication of AirbagDeployment

Accident Assist

Remote Door Locking/Unlocking

Stolen Vehicle Tracking

Misplaced Vehicle Assistance

Safe & Sound Plan Features

OnStar


－

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

To sign up for Personal Calling,press the OnStar button in yourvehicle, and notify the advisor thatyou’d like to sign up. The advisor willget all the information needed to setup your account, and provide youwith your new cellular telephonenumber.

You will need to provide a credit cardnumber, and prepurchase ‘‘units’’ orminutes of air time (one unit equalsone minute).

Youmust use voice commands to givethe OnStar system your callinginformation. To make a phone call:

Press the Call Answer/End(DOT) Button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Dial.’’

From your computer, you can loginto www. myonstar.com to makedinner reservations, purchase ticketsto events, send flowers, etc.

The Directions & Connections Planprovides these additional features.

The OnStaradvisor can give you verbaldirections from your current locationto a desired destination.

If you need a ride(taxi, limousine service, etc.) theOnStar advisor can make thearrangements for you. Use theOnStar button or call (888)4-ONSTAR.

The OnStar advisor cangive you information on nearby

hotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals,gas stations, and many otherservices in any area you are travelingin. The advisor can also help youwith hotel or restaurant reservations.

The Luxury & Leisure plan providesall the benefits of the other plans,and adds:

An OnStar advisor can assist youwith purchasing theater tickets,airline tickets, rental car reservationsfor a vacation, and just about anyother purchase you desire.

The OnStar Personal Calling plan isan extra-cost option that gives youthe ability to use your vehicle’sOnStar system as a hands-freecellular telephone.

OnStar


Placing a Telephone Call

Online Concierge Services

Directions & Connections PlanFeatures

Route Support

Ride Assist

Information and ConvenienceServices

Luxury & Leisure Plan Features

Personal Concierge Services

Personal Calling

171

－

－

－

－

The OnStar system can store up totwenty 32-digit telephone numbers inits memory. When you store thesenumbers in its memory, you giveeach one a nametag. When you wantto place a telephone call, you canrecall the number by giving thesystem the nametag.

When someone places a telephonecall to you, the audio system willmute and you will hear the ring.Press the DOT button to answer thecall. When you have completed thecall, press the DOT button again tohang up.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Voicefeedback On/Off.’’

Say ‘‘Voice Feedback.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Press the DOT button.

If you need to cancel the phone callattempt before entering thecomplete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’The system will cancel the operationand return to Ready.

If the system has difficultyunderstanding a voice command, itcan respond with:

‘‘Pardon’’ The system could notmatch your voice command to one itknows. Repeat the commanddistinctly.

‘‘Slower please’’ The systemmissed the command because it wasnot yet ready for it, or there was toomuch background noise. Repeat thecommand after a short pause.

Withvoice feedback off, the system willrespond with a tone rather than‘‘Ready,’’ or repeating each numberyou say. Other responses will still be

by voice. To turn voice feedback onor off:

If you make a mistake speaking adigit of the phone number, or thesystem responds with the wrongdigit, say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause thesystem to erase the last digit.

When you have finished yourconversation, press the DOTbutton again to hang up.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’and then repeat the completetelephone number. It will thenplace the telephone call.

Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete telephonenumber. Then say ‘‘Dial.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘NumberPlease.’’Say the first digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Always wait for OnStar to confirmthe digit before going to the nextdigit.Say the second digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.


OnStar

Using Nametags

Incoming Telephone Calls

Voice Feedback On/Off

172

－

－

＜＞

＜＞

－

To store atelephone number and its nametag inthe system:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Store.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘NumberPlease.’’Say the first digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the second digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete telephonenumber. Then say ‘‘Store’’ again.OnStar will respond with‘‘Nametag Please.’’

Say the name that you wantassigned to that telephone number.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Again.’’Repeat the nametag.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Oncemore.’’Repeat the nametag.

Toplace a telephone call using anametag:

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Storingnametag .’’

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Call.’’OnStar will respond with‘‘Nametag Please.’’Say the nametag for the numberyou want to call.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Calling

nametag ,’’ then place thetelephone call.

If you have forgotten what nametagsyou have stored, the system will readthem to you. Press the DOT button.When the system responds with‘‘Ready,’’ say ‘‘Directory.’’

To delete anametag and telephone number frommemory:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Delete.’’OnStar will respond with‘‘Nametag Please.’’

CONTINUED

Storing a Nametag

Placing a Telephone Call

Deleting a Nametag


OnStar

173

＜＞

＜＞

－

＜＞＜＞

Say the nametag for the numberyou want to delete.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Delete

nametag , Yes or No.’’Say ‘‘Yes.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Deleting

nametag .’’

To redialthe last telephone number youcalled:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Redial.’’OnStar will respond with‘‘Redialing,’’ then place thetelephone call.

By giving the system a security codethat you make up, you can lock outthe Personal Calling and VirtualAdvisor capabilities of the system sounauthorized people cannot maketelephone calls. To turn security on

or off:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Security.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Enterfour-digit security code.’’Say the first digit of the code.OnStar will repeat that digit.

OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the second digit of the code.

Say the third digit of the code.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the fourth digit of the code.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Securitycode number is now ON/OFF.’’

You must prepurchase units(minutes) of cellular air time. TheOnStar system tracks how manyunits you have remaining.

To find out how many units you haveremaining:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Units.’’

If you forget the security codeentered, or someone else enters asecurity code unknown to you, youmust contact an OnStar advisor toreset the code. Press the OnStarbutton, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verifyor add.’’Say ‘‘Verify.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Youhave number units remaining.’’

Redialing a Number

Security Code

Keeping Track of Units

OnStar


－

Although Virtual Advisor canprovide information on manysubjects, you can set up acustomized profile with OnStar thatmakes it easier to get informationabout areas that are of specificinterest to you. To do this, you mustgo to the OnStar web site, www.onstar.com. This is a secure site; youwill need your account number andPIN to access your accountinformation and to design yourcustomized profile.

If you do not have Internet access, adefault profile can be set up for you.

To use the Virtual Advisor from yourvehicle:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Virtual Advisor.’’

The system will connect you to theVirtual Advisor. The Virtual Advisorwill prompt you for the informationyou desire.

If you would like to hear a list ofvoice commands that are available,say ‘‘Help.’’ OnStar is continuallyupgrading the system, and newcommands become available.

To purchase moreunits of cellular air time:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Units.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verifyor add.’’Say ‘‘Add.’’OnStar will connect you to anadvisor to handle your purchase.

You can also call OnStar at (888) 4-ONSTAR, or get information aboutyour account at the OnStar web site,www.onstar.com.

When you subscribe to PersonalCalling, you can also enjoy thebenefits of Virtual Advisor. Thisfeature lets you hear information inyour vehicle about weather, sports,news, and stocks. It is even possibleto have your e-mail read to you.

OnStar Virtual AdvisorAdding Units

OnStar


You make up and provide yourPersonal Identification Number(PIN) when you establish youraccount with OnStar. You shouldwrite down your PIN and keep itwith you at all times.

You can change your PIN at any time.Contact the OnStar advisor bypressing the OnStar button, or bycalling (888) 4-ONSTAR.

If you forget your PIN, contact theOnStar advisor. For security reasons,your PIN will be mailed to you.

OnStar uses the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) to locate your vehiclefor functions such as route guidanceand roadside assistance. GPS isaffected by structures that canobstruct the signal, such as tunnels,parking structures, and tall buildings.It may not be possible for OnStar topinpoint your location if you are in ornear such structures.

OnStar uses cellular technology tocommunicate with your vehicle.Cellular coverage varies by location,which may affect the ability toestablish a connection, or the qualityof the connection.

When you turn off your vehicle’signition, the OnStar system goes intolow-power mode. After 48 hours, itswitches to sleep mode to conserveyour vehicle’s battery power.Features such as remote doorunlocking and misplaced vehicleassistance will not work after yourvehicle has been parked for morethat 48 hours.

Personal Identif ication Number System Limitations

OnStar


Before you begin driving your Acura,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 178.........................................Gasoline . 178

.........Service Station Procedures . 179................Filling the Fuel Tank . 179

....................Opening the Hood . 180...............................Oil Check . 181

.........Engine Coolant Check . 183...............................Fuel Economy . 184

............................Car Condition . 184...........................Driving Habits . 184

...Accessories and Modifications . 185.............................Carrying Cargo . 187

Before Driving

Before Driving 177

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Your Acura is designed to operate onpremium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emissions control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Acura dealer for service.

Help assure your car’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your car’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

178

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the car, park withthat side closest to the servicestation pumps.

Your car has an on-board refuelingvapor recovery system to helpkeep fuel vapors from going intothe atmosphere. If the fuel nozzlekeeps clicking off even though thetank is not full, there may be aproblem with this system. Consultyour dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Filling the Fuel Tank

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 179

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

PPuullll

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Standing in front of the car, reachin between the hood and the frontbumper with your finger. Thehood latch handle is under the ‘‘A’’logo. Slide the latch handle to theright.

1. 2.

5.

6.

310


Before Driving

Opening the Hood

180

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

LLAATTCCHH HHAANNDDLLEE

CONTINUED

If you can open the hood withoutsliding the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the car with fuel. Wait a fewminutes after turning the engine offbefore you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

1.

3.

254


Before Driving

Oil Check

181

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Insert it all the way back in its tube.Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

4.3.2.

239


Before Driving

Adding Oil

182

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourAcura.

243

237


Before Driving

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner MaintenanceChecks

183

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

MMIINN

MMAAXX

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C orset the climate control to a highertemperature to cut down on airconditioning use. Use the flow-through ventilation when the outsideair temperature is moderate.

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Always maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car’s underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

237

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Car Condition

Fuel Economy

Before Driving184

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize your car.These accessories have beendesigned and approved for your car,and are covered by warranty.

Non-Acura accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Have the installer contact yourAcura dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

Before installing any accessory:

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car’s electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operationof your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

186

314

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving 185

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar’s handling, stability andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Acuraseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to impact speedbumps or other raised objects,which could cause the airbags todeploy.

Raising the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult with your Acura dealer.

Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving186

＊＊

＊＊Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items.In addition, the trunk pass-throughallows you to carry longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car’s handling, stability, andoperation and make it unsafe. Beforecarrying any type of cargo, be sure toread the following pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 187

TTRRUUNNKK

:: 33..22 CCLL wwiitthhoouutt NNaavviiggaattiioonn SSyysstteemm

SSEEAATT--BBAACCKK PPOOCCKKEETTSS

GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXX

SSTTOORRAAGGEE TTRRAAYYDDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETTCCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

RREEAARR CCOONNSSOOLLEECCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

CCOONNSSOOLLEE PPOOCCKKEETT

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around the carduring a crash.

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

Add up the weight of all occupants.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

The maximum load for your car is700 lbs (325 kg).

Subtract the total from 700 lbs(325 kg).

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving188

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Acuradealer for further information.

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.To use the cargo net, hook it to thebuttons on the floor and sides of thetrunk. You can use the cargo net inseveral configurations by hooking itto different buttons.

When you are not using the cargonet, store it in the pocket in the leftside of the trunk.

52

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Cargo Net

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 189

TTRRUUNNKK NNEETT HHOOOOKK

CCAARRGGOO NNEETT

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your car, the braking system,the Traction Control System, theVehicle Stability Assist System, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 192.......................Starting the Engine . 193

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 193

....6-speed Manual Transmission . 194.....Recommended Shift Points . 195

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 195.......................Reverse Lockout . 196

..............Automatic Transmission . 197.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 197

................Shift Lever Positions . 198..............Engine Speed Limiter . 203

....................Shift Lock Release . 204...........................................Parking . 205

.....................The Braking System . 206.............Brake Wear Indicators . 206

...............Brake System Design . 207.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 207

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 208........................ABS Indicator . 208

..............Traction Control System . 209...Vehicle Stability Assist System . 212

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 215...........................Towing a Trailer . 217

Driving

Driving 191

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

15

10.

11.

12.

91

98

76

193

57

Preparing to Drive

Driving192

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within

15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to the problem.

Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Driving

Starting the Engine

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

193

The manual transmission is synchro-nized in all forward gears for smoothoperation. It has a lockout so youcannot shift directly from Fifth toReverse instead of sixth (see page

). When shifting up or down,make sure you push the clutch pedaldown all the way, shift to the nextgear, and let the pedal up gradually.When you are not shifting, do notrest your foot on the clutch pedal.This can cause your clutch to wearout faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the car moving. Pushdown the clutch pedal, and pause fora few seconds before shifting intoReverse, or shift into one of theforward gears for a moment. Thisstops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

196

Driving

6-speed Manual Transmission

194

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)47 mph (75 km/h)52 mph (83 km/h)

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Driving


Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

195

With the clutch pedal depressed,move the shift lever to the First/Second gear side of the Neutralgate, then shift to Reverse.

If you are still unable to shift toReverse, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Depress the clutch pedal and shiftto Reverse.

With the clutch pedal still de-pressed, start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to Reverse, your car may bedeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Acura dealer.

The 6-speed manual transmissionhas an electric lockout so you cannotaccidentally shift from Fifth toReverse instead of Sixth while thecar is moving. If you cannot shift toReverse when the car is stopped:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Driving


Reverse Lockout

196

Your Acura’s transmission has fiveforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

This indicator in the tachometershows which position the shift leveris in. The illuminated number next tothe ‘‘D ’’ indicator shows you thegear you have selected in theSequential SportShift mode.

The ‘‘D ’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapidacceleration and have thetransmission checked by anauthorized Acura dealer as soon aspossible.

The malfunction indicator lamp maycome on along with the ‘‘D ’’indicator if there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem.

5

5

5

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Automatic Transmission

Driving 197

The shift lever has nine positions. Itmust be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD , D , D , 2, 1, N, R, or theSequential SportShift mode, pressfirmly on the brake pedal and keepyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

To select the Sequential SportShiftmode, slide the shift lever toward theleft from the ‘‘D ’’ position.In this mode the shift lever allowsyou to shift up and down manually.

You cannot shift out of Park with thebrake pedal depressed when theignition switch is in LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I).

Whenever you move the shift lever,slide it along the guide on theconsole.

5 4 3

5

To shift from:P to R

R to NN to DD to DD to DD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to DD to NN to RR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal, thenmove the shift lever.

Move the lever.

5

5 4

4 3

3

3

3 4

4 5

5

Shift Lever Positions


Driving198

SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR

SSEEQQUUEENNTTIIAALLSSPPOORRTTSSHHIIFFTTMMOODDEEPPOOSSIITTIIOONN

－－

－－

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Move the shiftlever to the right to shift out of thePark position.

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

Your car has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toReverse from Neutral or any otherdriving position when the vehiclespeed exceeds 7 9 mph (12 14km/h).

If you cannot shift to Reverse whenthe car is stopped, press the brakepedal and slowly shift to Neutral, andthen to Reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your car’s batteryis disconnected or goes dead, youcannot shift to Reverse. (Refer toShift Lock Release on page ).

204

204

CONTINUED

Park (P) Reverse (R)


Driving 199

－

－

－

＋＋

－－

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for your speed andacceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

Withthe shift lever in ‘‘D ’’ position, youcan select the Sequential SportShiftmode to shift gears; much like amanual transmission, but without aclutch pedal.

Even with the Sequential SportShiftMode selected, the transmission willautomatically upshift and downshiftbetween first and second gear.

To enter the Sequential SportShiftmode, move the shift lever to the left.To return to ‘‘D ’’, move the shiftlever to the right.

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D ’’ to the Sequential SportShiftmode, the display shows the selectedgear.

In the Sequential SportShift mode,each time you push forward on theshift lever, the transmission shifts toa higher gear. Pull back on the leverto downshift. The number of thegear selected is displayed next to the‘‘D ’’ indicator (see page ).197

5

5

5

5

Neutral (N)

Drive (D )5

Sequential SportShift Mode


Driving200

DDoowwnnsshhiifftt

UUppsshhiifftt

→

→

→

→

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission will start infirst gear and then automaticallyupshift to second gear. You have tomanually upshift between secondand fifth gears. Make sure youupshift before the engine speedreaches the tachometer’s red zone.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3). There is noautomatic downshift when you pushthe accelerator pedal to the floor.

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under the followingconditions:

To shift from

4 3

5 4

Speed range

under 18 mph(29 km/h)


To shift from

4 3

5 4

Speed range



Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing or provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The transmission will also shiftautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It will downshift tofirst gear when the vehicle speed isunder 9 mph (15 km/h).

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission will not downshift.

The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

Driving uphill

Driving on level roads and downhill

CONTINUED

Driving


201

－

－

→

→

→

→

→

→

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

If the car speed slows to below theredline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmission willdownshift and the display will showthe selected lower gear.

If the transmission temperature isbelow 14 °F ( 10 °C), you may notbe able to use the SequentialSportShift mode.

These positionsare similar to D , except when youselect the D position, only the firstfour gears are selected. When youselect D , only the first three gearsare selected. D can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenfourth and fifth gears in stop-and-godriving, and D can keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears.

Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. Dgives you more power and increasedengine braking.

The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting.

To shift from

2 3

3 4

4 5

Speed range

over 9 mph(15 km/h)

over 18 mph(29 km/h)

over 34 mph(55 km/h)

Speed range

under 60 mph(96 km/h)under 65 mph(104 km/h)

under 93 mph(150 km/h)under 104 mph(166 km/h)


To shift from

3 2

4 3

5 4

54

34

3

3

3

1 :2 :

Premium modelType-S

1

2

1

2

Drive (D , D )4 3


Driving202

－

－For faster acceleration when in D ,D or D , you can get thetransmission to automaticallydownshift by pushing the acceleratorpedal to the floor. The transmissionwill shift down one or two gears,depending on your speed.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

With the lever in thisposition, the transmission locks inFirst gear.

If you shift into First position whenthe vehicle speed is above 31 mph(50 km/h), the transmission shiftsinto Second gear first to avoidsudden engine braking.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

34 5

Second (2)

First (1) Engine Speed Limiter


Driving 203

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Acura dealer.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work. This procedureis also used to release the ReverseLockout.

Insert a screwdriver in the ShiftLock Release slot.

Push down on the screwdriver andmove the shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

To release the Reverse Lockout,move the shift lever from Neutralto Reverse, then to Park.

Remove the screwdriver from theShift Lock Release slot, thenreinstall the cover. Make sure thenotch on the cover is on the rightside. Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

Set the Parking brake.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe OFF (0) position.

To release the Reverse Lockout,make sure the ignition switch is inthe ACCESSORY (I) position.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever.Use a small flat-tipped screwdriveror small metal plate (neither areincluded in the tool kit) to removethe cover. Carefully pry on theedge of the cover.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release


Driving204

SSHHIIFFTT LLOOCCKK RREELLEEAASSEE SSLLOOTTCCOOVVEERR

－

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter. Check theindicator on the driver’s door toverify that the security system isset.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

If your car has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the car frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in first gear.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb. If youhave a manual transmission, put it inreverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving 205

Your Acura is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible ‘‘screeching.’’

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving206

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal; it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Your car has an Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS) as standardequipment. ABS helps to prevent thewheels from locking up and skiddingduring hard braking, allowing you toretain steering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe car (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

CONTINUED

Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump thebrake pedal;

The Braking System

Driving 207

FFrroonntt

＊＊

＊＊

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

itonly helps with steering controlduring braking. You should alwaysmaintain a safe following distancefrom other vehicles.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possible.

61

Important Safety Reminders ABS Indicator

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop the car;

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

The Braking System

Driving208

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

Your Acura is equipped with aTraction Control System (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces. The TCS assistsonly in low-speed, low-tractionconditions; up to approximately 18mph (30 km/h).

TCS monitors the speed of all fourwheels. When it senses a front wheellosing traction, it applies braking tothat wheel. The TCS indicatorflashes when this occurs.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your car’s whole brakingsystem and cannot prevent skiddingif you enter a corner too fast. It isstill your responsibility to drive atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.

When starting out or driving at lowspeeds on a loose or slippery roadsurface, you may notice that thevehicle does not respond to theaccelerator in the same way it doesat other times. This is a sign TCS isactivating. You will see the TCSindicator light flash.

You should still install winter tires onyour car during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with vehicle. Exercise thesame caution in winter driving as youwould if your car was not equippedwith TCS.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page ) mayactivate the TCS. You should turn offthe system.

294

CONTINUED

On Premium model

Driving

Traction Control System

209

TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

If the brakes overheat while TCS isactivating, the TCS indicator willstop flashing and stay on temporarily.This indicates that TCS has turnedoff. After the brakes have cooleddown (usually for about 10 minutes),TCS will turn back on and theindicator will turn off.

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSindicator light comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the Traction ControlSystem on and off. You cannot turnoff the TCS while the TCS indicatorlight is flashing.


Driving

TCS ON/OFF Switch

210

TTCCSS OONN//OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see on page

).

The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for one or two seconds andthen go out. This is normal.

The Traction Control System turnson every time you start the engine,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the vehicle.

The TCS indicator comes on orflashes under the following condi-tions:

When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

When you manually turn off TCS.

If the TCS indicator comes on andstays on for more than 10 minuteswhile driving, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine, and watch theTCS indicator. If the indicatorremains on, or comes back on whiledriving, have the system inspectedby your Acura dealer. You can stilldrive the vehicle without TCS.It flashes when TCS is regulating

wheelspin.

If the system’s diagnostics sensesa problem with TCS, the indicatorwill come on and stay on.

If the brakes overheat, theindicator will come on.

208ABS Indicator

TCS Indicator


Driving 211

The VSA system cannot enhance thecar’s driving stability in all situationsand does not control your vehicle’sentire braking system. It is still yourresponsibility to drive and corner atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA Activation indicator blink.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. You will also seethe VSA Activation Indicator blink.

The Vehicle Stability Assist systemhelps to stabilize the vehicle duringcornering if the car turns more orless than desired. It also assists youin maintaining traction whileaccelerating on loose or slipperyroad surfaces. It does this byregulating the engine’s output, andby selectively applying braking.

On Type-S with A/T VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving212

VVSSAA AACCTTIIVVAATTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

If the VSA indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine, and watch theVSA system indicator. If theindicator remains on, or comes backon while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your Acuradealer.

When VSA is off, the VSA ActivationIndicator light comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turnedON (II), there may be a problemwith the VSA system. Have yourdealer inspect your car as soon aspossible.

Without VSA, your car will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the Vehicle StabilityAssist system on and off.

The VSA system indicator (see page) comes on and stays on when

there is a problem with the VSAsystem. The VSA Activationindicator will also come on.

The VSA system indicator may comeon along with the ABS indicator ifthere is a problem with the anti-lockbrake system.

62

CONTINUED

VSA System Indicator VSA Off Switch


Driving 213

VVSSAA SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR VVSSAA OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove the car.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourcar. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour car was not equipped with VSA.

270

294

VSA and Tire Sizes

Driving


214

－ Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

CONTINUED

Driving Technique

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving 215

－－Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defroster and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepages and ).128 133

Visibility Traction

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving216

Your Acura has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your car’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a Trailer

Driving 217

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Premium model

Premium model

Type-S

Type-S with A/T

Type-S with M/T

218

2,445 lbs (1,110 kg)

1,950 lbs (885 kg)

4,280 lbs (1,940 kg)

4,365 lbs (1,980 kg)

2,425 lbs (1,100 kg)

1,950 lbs (885 kg)

4,321 lbs (1,960 kg)

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

Acura recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

CONTINUED

Safety Chains

Trailer Brakes

Hitches

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Checking Loads

Towing a Trailer

Driving 219

Your car has a trailer lightingconnector located in the trunk by theleft taillight. To use the connector,undo the fastener and unscrew thecargo net mounting button on theleft side of the trunk lining. Refer tothe drawing in this page for thewiring color code and purpose ofeach pin.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your car fromyour Acura dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary intrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving220

GGRROOUUNNDD((BBLLAACCKK))

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT((GGRREEEENN//BBLLAACCKK))

RRIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((GGRREEEENN//YYEELLLLOOWW))

TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT((RREEDD//BBLLAACCKK))

LLEEFFTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((GGRREEEENN//BBLLUUEE))

BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT((WWHHIITTEE//BBLLAACCKK))

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation. 217 218

267Pre-Tow ChecklistAdditional Trailer Equipment

Towing a Trailer

Driving 221

－－

－－

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

Gear position

1

2

3, 4

Speed range

0 37 mph(0 60 km/h)

12 68 mph

over 25 mph(over 40 km/h)

When towing a trailer in theSequential SportShift mode, selectFourth, Third, Second, or First gear;depending on the vehicle speed androad condition. Do not use Fifth gear.The recommended speed range foreach gear position is shown in thetable.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use the D or Dposition when towing a trailer onlevel roads. D is the proper shiftlever position to use when towing atrailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘

’’ in the following column foradditional gear information.)

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently between 4th and 5thgears while going up a hill, shift toD . And if the transmission shiftsfrequently between 3rd and 4thgears, shift to D .

(20 110 km/h)

5 4

3 4

3

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Drivingon Hills

Towing a Trailer

Driving222

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

bottom

ParkingHandling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Towing a Trailer

Driving 223

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Acura, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Acuradealer.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your car wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 226.Important Safety Precautions . 227

.................Maintenance Schedule . 228...Required Maintenance Record . 235

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 237..............................Fluid Locations . 238

......................................Engine Oil . 239..................................Adding Oil . 239

....................Recommended Oil . 239..............................Synthetic Oil . 240

....................................Additives . 240.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 241

.............................Cooling System . 243............Adding Engine Coolant . 243

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 245....................Windshield Washers . 249

.......................Transmission Fluid . 250Automatic

.........................Transmission . 2505-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 251................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 252

............................Brake System . 252...........................Clutch System . 253

..............................Power Steering . 253....................................Hood Latch . 254

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 254....................................Spark Plugs . 256

..............................Replacement . 256............................Specifications . 258

...........................................Battery . 259.................................Wiper Blades . 262

..............Air Conditioning System . 264..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 265

.....................................Drive Belts . 265....................................Timing Belt . 266

...............................................Tires . 266......................................Inflation . 266

..................................Inspection . 268..............................Maintenance . 269.............................Tire Rotation . 269

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 270......................Wheels and Tires . 271

..........................Winter Driving . 271.............................Snow Tires . 272............................Tire Chains . 272

.............................................Lights . 273.....................Headlight Aiming . 275

........................Replacing Bulbs . 275...........................Storing Your Car . 283

341

Maintenance

Maintenance 225

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by an Acuratechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance226

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance


Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

227

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

Avoid exceeding your car’s loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages. Select the schedulefor ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most ofyour driving is done under one ormore of the conditions listed on thatpage. Otherwise, follow the schedulefor ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’

Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourcar as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

178

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

228

＃

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Acurarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of genuineAcura parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

229

－

＃

＃

＃

Follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if thesevere driving conditionsspecified in the SevereConditions MaintenanceSchedule do not apply.

NOTE: If you onlydrive under a

‘‘severe’’ condition, you shouldfollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

230

Visually inspect the following items:

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles(96,000 km) or 5 years

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt, and inspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years

Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years

:

Adjust only if noisy

229

M/TA/T

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

－－

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□

□

□

□□□□

□

□

□

□

＃

＃

＃

Maintenance 231

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C

A

B

C

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 269).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Replace air cleaner element.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter.

7,500 mi/12,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr22,500 mi/36,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs37,500 mi/60,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs52,500 mi/84,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs67,500 mi/108,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs82,500 mi/132,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs97,500 mi/156,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

112,500 mi/180,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

9 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump.Inspect valve clearance.Check idle speed.Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.

Replace engine coolant, then replace every60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace automatic transmission fluid, thenreplace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace manual transmission fluid every120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).

230

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

:229

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

－

－

＊＊

＃

＃＊

＊

＃＃

Follow the Severe ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if youdrive your car underone or more of the followingconditions:

Driving less than 5 miles (8km) per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving lessthan 10 miles (16 km) per trip.Driving in extremely hot[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.Extensive idling or longperiods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with aroof rack, or driving inmountainous conditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, orde-iced roads.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

MAINLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

232

Visually inspect the following items:

Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles(96,000 km) or 5 years

Replace engine oil and oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantClean ( ) or replace ( ) aircleaner element

Use normal schedule except industy conditions

Inspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt , and inspect water pump

Inspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterLubricate all hinges, locks, and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 monthsTie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension components, Driveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust system, Fuel lines and connections

Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years

See information on maintenance and

emissions warranty, last column, page

.

Adjust only if noisy

Type-SPremium model

1 :2 :

:

266265

229

M/TA/T

1

2

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

－－

□

□□

□

□

□

□□□□□□□□□

□□

□□□□□□□□

＊

＊

＃＊

＊

＃

＃

＊

＊＊＊

＃

CONTINUEDMaintenance 233

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D

A

B

C

D

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

3,750 mi/6,000 km7,500 mi/12,000 km11,250 mi/18,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr

18,750 mi/30,000 km22,500 mi/36,000 km26,250 mi/42,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs33,750 mi/54,000 km37,500 mi/60,000 km41,250 mi/66,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs

48,750 mi/78,000 km52,500 mi/84,000 km56,250 mi/90,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs

60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs63,750 mi/102,000 km67,500 mi/108,000 km71,250 mi/114,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs

78,750 mi/126,000 km

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Clean air cleaner element.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Clean air cleaner element.

Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace transmission fluid.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Clean air cleaner element.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace engine oil and filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 269).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Replace air cleaner element. (Type-S)Check parking brake adjustment.Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Replace air cleaner element. (Premium model)Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter .

232

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special drivingconditions.

See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.



NOTE:

Premium model only1 :2 :3 :

:229

266265

1

1

2

1

3

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

□

□

□□□□□

□

□□

□□

＊

＊

＊

＃

＊＊

＊

Maintenance234


See timing belt on page for replacement information underspecial driving conditions.See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement informationunder special driving conditions.


NOTE:

:

1 :2 :

3 :

Premium model only229

266

265

Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace automatic transmission fluid.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.Check idle speed.Clean air cleaner element.Replace spark plugs.Inspect valve clearance.

Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant, then replace every

60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.Replace automatic transmission fluid.Replace manual transmission fluid.

82,500 mi/132,000 km86,250 mi/138,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs93,750 mi/150,000 km97,500 mi/156,000 km101,250 mi/162,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

108,750 mi/174,000 km112,500 mi/180,000 km116,250 mi/186,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

9 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

2

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

235

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km(or 1 year)

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km(or 2 years)

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km


78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km


232230

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

236

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km


126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km


150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km


174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

When adding or replacing fluidswithin the engine compartment, suchas oil and coolant, be careful ofspillage.This may lead to damage parts in theengine compartment.

181

183

249

250

252

266

273

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 237

Fluid Locations

Maintenance238

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((OOrraannggee lloooopp))

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD((BBlluuee ccaapp))

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGFFLLUUIIDD ((RReedd ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD((66--ssppeeeedd MMaannuuaallTTrraannssmmiissssiioonn oonnllyy))

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD((GGrraayy ccaapp))

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICCTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNFFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTTRREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

CONTINUED

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’Oil is a major contributor to your

engine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

Adding Oil Recommended Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 239

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPPAAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Acura, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30oil may be used. However, it shouldbe replaced with 5W-20 at the nextoil change.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

Your Acura does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil Additives

240

AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from your Acuradealer) is required to remove thefilter.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil

Maintenance 241

WWAASSHHEERR

OOIILL DDRRAAIINNBBOOLLTT

OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR

Let the engine run for severalminutes and check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

6.

7.

8.

9.

4.

5.

Engine Oil

Maintenance242

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.The coolant you add should alwaysbe a mixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing. If it is not available, you mayuse another major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible. 1.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 243


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car’s coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Cooling System

Maintenance244


RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

CONTINUED

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe heater temperature controldial to maximum heat (climatecontrol to 90°F/32°C). Turn offthe ignition. Open the hood. Makesure the engine and radiator arecool to the touch.

Remove the radiator cap.

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard.

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic.

Drain the coolant into anappropriate container.

1.

2.

3.

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 245

DDRRAAIINN PPLLUUGG

Install a rubber hose on the drainbolt at the rear of the enginecylinder block. Loosen the drainbolt.

Before removing the reserve tank,remove the cruise control cablefrom its clip, then remove theground cable from the clip on thereserve tank. To remove thecruise control cable, pivot theupper part of the clip and pushdown the lower part slightly.

Drain the coolant into anappropriate container.

Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant into anappropriate container, then put thetank back in its holder.

After installing the tank back inplace, put the cables back in theirclips.

5.4. 6.

Cooling System

Maintenance246

HHOOLLDDEERRDDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTTRRUUBBBBEERRHHOOSSEE RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK CCAAPPCCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL CCAABBLLEE


CONTINUED

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Tighten the drain bolt at the rearof the engine cylinder blocksecurely.

Tightening torque:

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.The cooling system capacity is:

Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine. Pour coolant into theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck.

7.

8.

9. 10.

Cooling System

Maintenance 247

FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKKFFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree


7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

1.48 US gal (5.6 , 1.23 Imp gal)

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Remove the radiator cap. Pourcoolant into the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck and into thereserve tank up to the MAX mark.

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the cooling fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

Cooling System

Maintenance248


Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the passenger’s sideheadlight.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page

).Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

64

Windshield Washers

Maintenance

Canadian Models

249

LLEEVVEELL GGAAUUGGEE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid to bring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If itis not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Have thetransmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Maintenance

Transmission Fluid


250

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Acura dealer.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.

Remove the check bolt and look fortransmission fluid coming out of thebolt hole. If a small amount of fluiddrips out of the bolt hole, reinstallthe check bolt.

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt. Slowly add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the check bolthole. Let the fluid run out until itstops, then reinstall the check boltand the filler bolt.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

6. 6-speed Manual Transmission

Maintenance

Transmission Fluid

251

FFIILLLLEERR BBOOLLTT

CCHHEECCKK BBOOLLTT

DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car’s brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

Brake System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance252

MMIINN

MMAAXX

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.Check the level when the engine is

cold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Power SteeringClutch System

Maintenance

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering

253

UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL

LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL

MMAAXX

MMIINN

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Acura dealer.

The air cleaner element should becleaned or replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.

To replace it:Remove the cruise control cablefrom its clip.

Loosen the four bolts by using aPhillips-head screwdriver andremove the air cleaner housingcover.

Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your Acura dealer to dothis service.

1.

2. On Premium model

Premium model

Hood Latch Air Cleaner Element

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)

Replacement

Hood Latch, Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance254

LLAATTCCHH AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY

BBOOLLTTSS

Loosen the two bolts with aPhillips-head screwdriver. Removethe air cleaner housing cover bylifting and pivoting it out of theloops.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, tighten the four bolts.

Align the tabs on the battery sideand reinstall the air cleanerhousing cover, then tighten thetwo bolts.

Put the cruise control cable backin place.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

On Premium modelOn Type-S

On Type-S

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance 255

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERREELLEEMMEENNTTLLOOOOPP PPrreemmiiuumm mmooddeell

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERREELLEEMMEENNTT

BBOOLLTTSS

TTyyppee--SS

The spark plugs in your car are aspecial platinum-tipped design forlonger life. The spark plugs shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Loosen the two holding clips byturning the heads one-quarter turncounterclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver. Remove the cover onthe front cylinder bank by pullingit straight up.

Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

1.

2.

3.

Replacement

Spark Plugs

Maintenance256

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP IIGGNNIITTIIOONN CCOOIILL

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR

LLOOCCKKTTAABB

Use a wrench to remove thehexagon socket head cap boltholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out.

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

4.

5.

6. 7.

Spark Plugs

Maintenance 257

HHEEXXAAGGOONN SSOOCCKKEETT HHEEAADD CCAAPP BBOOLLTT

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

＋－

＋－

Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe hexagon socket head cap bolt.

Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

Reinstall the cover on the frontcylinder bank while putting itsmounting clip in the hole on thepassenger’s side. Secure the coverby turning the heads of the twoholding clips one-quarter turnclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Spark Plug Gap:

Spark Plug Gap:

8.

9.

10.

11.

NGK:DENSO:

NGK:DENSO:

Specifications:

Spark Plugs

Maintenance

Premium model

Type-S

258

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

PZFR5F-11PKJ16CR-L11

PZFR6E-11PKJ20CR-M11

00.1 mm

00.1 mm

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator’s colors.

Check the condition of your car’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

To remove the battery cover, pull upon the right side of the cover toremove it from the bolt, then pull thecover out.

To reinstall the cover, insert the pinson the left side of the cover into theholes and put the cover over thebattery, then push the right side ofthe cover over the bolt.

CONTINUED

Battery

Maintenance 259

TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWWTTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW

BBAATTTTEERRYYCCOOVVEERR

－

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car’selectrical system.

Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

Battery

Maintenance260

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, all stored drivingpositions will be lost. To store thedriving positions again, see thestoring procedure on page .

The Navigation System will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to theNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, your driver’s powerwindow (see page ) and youraudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

100

106

157

3.2 CL with Navigation System

Battery

Maintenance 261

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar’s electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables bef ore connecting thebattery to a charger.

－

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold it in while youpush the blade assembly towardthe base of the arm.

To replace the blade:Turn the ignition ON (II), switchthe wipers to INT or (lowposition), then turn the ignitionOFF when the wiper arm isapproximately midway in its travel.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

1.

2. 3.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance262

WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS

LLOOCCKKTTAABB

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II)and return the windshield wipersto their park position.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Wiper Blades, Air Conditioning System

Maintenance 263

BBLLAADDEE BBLLAADDEE

RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently. 326

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance264

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

－－

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) under nor-mal conditions. It should be replacedevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if youdrive primarily in urban areas thathave high concentrations of soot inthe air from industry and diesel-pow-ered vehicles. Replace it more oftenif air flow from the climate controlsystem becomes less than usual.Have dust and pollen filter replacedby your Acura dealer.

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the climatecontrol system.

Check the condition of the two drivebelts (power steering belt andalternator belt). Examine the edgesof each belt for cracks or fraying.

Check the tension of the powersteering belt by pushing on it withyour thumb midway between thepulleys.

The belt should have the following‘‘play’’ or deflection.

Power steering belt:

If you see signs of wear or looseness,have your dealer adjust or replacethe belts.

Drive BeltsDust and Pollen Filter

Dust and Pollen Filter, Drive Belts

Maintenance 265

AALLTTEERRNNAATTOORR BBEELLTT

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG BBEELLTT

0.51 0.65 in (13.0 16.5 mm)

－－ We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

The timing belt should normally bereplaced at the intervals shown inthe maintenance schedule.

Replace this belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your car in one ormore of these conditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

InflationTiresTiming Belt

Timing Belt, Tires

Maintenance266

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the car has been drivenseveral miles), you will see readings4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

Tire Size

Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size

Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

CONTINUED

Premium model

Type-S

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Tires

Maintenance 267

P205/60R16 91V

P215/50R17 93V

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.Your car’s tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Inspection

Tires

Maintenance268

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair. To help increase tire life and

distribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance 269

((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

FFrroonntt FFrroonntt

Improper wheel weights can damageyour car’s aluminum wheels. Use onlygenuine Acura wheel weights f orbalancing.

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

The tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy. It is best to replace all four tires at

the same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car’s handling.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance270

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Wheels:

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure you use an identical stylealuminum alloy wheel that originallycame on your Acura. Replacementwheels are available at your Acuradealer.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with the car.Tire size and construction can affectwheel speed and may cause thesystem to work inconsistently.

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

328

CONTINUED

Premium model

Premium model

Type-S

Type-S

Winter DrivingWheels and Tires

Tires

Maintenance 271

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

P205/60R16 91V

17 x 7 JJ

P215/50R17 93V

If you mount snow tires on yourAcura, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommen-dations.

Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should notbe used. No matter how tight theyseem to be installed, they can comeinto contact with the body andsuspension, causing serious damage.

Because your Acura has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices on thefront tires. Use traction devices onlywhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with them installed. Ifyou hear them coming in contactwith the body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Make sure the cables areinstalled tightly, and that they arenot contacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove them as soon as

you begin driving on cleared roads.

Do not install any type of chains orcable-type traction devices on yourvehicle.

Snow Tires Tire ChainsPremium model only

Type-S

Tires

Maintenance272

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your car’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe car.

Check the operation of your car’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance 273

SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT

LLOOWW BBEEAAMMHHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

327

Lights

Maintenance274

HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTTTTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT

LLIICCEENNSSEE PPLLAATTEE LLIIGGHHTT

SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILL//SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTTSS SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTTSS

Halogen bulbs are used for the highbeam headlight bulbs. Whenreplacing a high beam headlight bulb,handle it by its base and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thecar to your dealer to have it replaced.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your car was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustment of theheadlights should be performed byan Acura technician or otherqualified mechanic.

CONTINUED

Replacing a High Beam HeadlightBulb

Headlight Aiming

Lights

Maintenance 275

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

(Driver’s side)Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

Open the hood.

If you need to change a bulb onthe driver’s side, remove theradiator reserve tank.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

Lights

Maintenance276

BBUULLBB

TTAABB

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger’s side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove the front turn signal/parking light bulb, push it inslightly and turn itcounterclockwise. To remove theside marker bulb, pull it straightout of its socket.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach clip in place by pushing onthe center.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Front Turn Signal/Parking and Side Marker LightBulbs

277

HHOOLLDDIINNGGCCLLIIPPSS

Open the trunk.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Remove the fastener on the edgeof the trunk opening by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin.Unscrew the cargo net mountingbutton. Pull the lining back.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight, stop/tail/side marker light, back-uplight, or turn signal.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance278

FFAASSTTEENNEERR

CCAARRGGOO NNEETTMMOOUUNNTTIINNGGBBUUTTTTOONN

Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks.


Put the fastener in the hole on theside of the trunk lining and pushon the center until it locks (thecenter is flush with the head).

Screw the cargo net mountingbutton back into the hole.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.Install the new bulb in the socket.

1.

2.

8.

9.

3.

4.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance 279

The courtesy lights in the doors androof come apart the same way. Theydo not use the same type of bulb.

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out. Push the new bulbinto the socket.

Put the lens back in place andtighten the two screws securely.

Use a small Phillips-headscrewdriver to remove the twoscrews. Remove the lens from thelicense plate assembly.

1.

2.

3.

1.

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorCourtesy Lights

Lights

Maintenance280

CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

SSCCRREEWWSS

Door light:Pry on the top middle of the lens.

Ceiling light:Pry on the front edge of the lensnear both sides.

Spotlights:Pry on the front edge in front ofboth spotlights.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

2.

3.

Maintenance

Lights

281

VVAANNIITTYY MMIIRRRROORR LLIIGGHHTTSSPPOOTTLLIIGGHHTTSS DDOOOORR LLIIGGHHTT

Open the trunk. Pull down thetrunk light cover.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs.

Push the cover back in place.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Maintenance

Lights

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

282

TTRRUUNNKK LLIIGGHHTT CCOOVVEERR

Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your car for 12 monthsor longer, have your Acura dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000km) maintenance schedule (NormalConditions) as soon as you take itout of storage (see page ). Thereplacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the car has actuallyreached that time or mileage.Leave the parking brake off. Put

the transmission in Reverse(6-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

230

241

Maintenance

Storing Your Car

283

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Acura helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your car andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 286.....................................Washing . 286

.......................................Waxing . 287....................Aluminum Wheels . 287

..........................Paint Touch-up . 287..................................Interior Care . 288...................................Carpeting . 288.................................Floor Mats . 288

.........................................Fabric . 289...........................................Vinyl . 289

.......................................Leather . 289...................................Seat Belts . 289

................................Wood Trim . 290....................................Windows . 290

..........................Air Fresheners . 290....................Corrosion Protection . 291

.................................Body Repairs . 292

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 285

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Frequent washing helps preserveyour car’s beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

287

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

286

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.

－

－

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Acurawhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Acura ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Clean your Acura’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Always wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing. Inspect your car frequently for chips

or scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your car’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing

Aluminum Wheels

Paint Touch-up

287

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

The Acura driver’s floor mat thatcame with your car was designed tobe hooked over the floor mat anchor.This keeps the floor mat from slidingforward and possibly interfering withthe pedals.

If you remove the floor mat, makesure to re-anchor it when you put itback in your car.

If you replace it, use an Acura floormat that is designed to be used withthe floor mat anchor in your car.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

Carpeting Floor Mats

Appearance Care

Interior Care

288

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

CONTINUED

Seat BeltsFabric

Vinyl

Leather

Appearance Care

Interior Care

289

LLOOOOPP

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces. If you use a liquid air freshener,

make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Clean the wood trim with a soft clothdipped in clear water and wipe it drywith another soft cloth. Soap mayleave a film that dulls the finish.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

Windows Air Fresheners

Wood Trim

Interior Care

Appearance Care290

The rear window def ogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Acura. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Be carefulof the ABS wheel sensors andwiring at each wheel.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thecar stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care 291

Make sure the repair facility usesAcura replacement body parts. Somecompanies make sheet metal piecesthat seem to duplicate the originalAcura body parts, but are actuallyinferior in fit, finish, and corrosionresistance. Once installed, they donot give the same high-qualityappearance.

Take your car to your authorizedAcura dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant Acura parts used in the repair.Although most insurers recognizethe quality of original parts, somemay try to specify that the repairs bedone with other available parts. Youshould investigate this before anyrepairs have begun.

Body repairs can affect your car’sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care292

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 294....................Changing a Flat Tire . 295

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 300Nothing Happens or the

Starter Motor Operates........................Very Slowly . 301

The Starter Operates................................Normally . 302................................Jump Starting . 303

............If Your Engine Overheats . 306.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 308..........Charging System Indicator . 309

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 310.......................Readiness Codes . 311

...............Brake System Indicator . 312..................Closing the Moonroof . 313

..............................................Fuses . 314..........Checking and Replacing . 315

......................Emergency Towing . 320

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 293

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your car as soon as you can.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not mount snow chains on the

compact spare.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the Traction ControlSystem (see page ). Drivingwith the compact spare tire mayactivate the TCS.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ).Driving with the compact sparetire may activate the VSA system.

Do not drive with the compactspare tire mounted on the frontwheels for a long period; it willdamage the Limited SlipDifferential.

213

210

Premium model

Type-S with M/T

Type-S with A/T

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected294

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKK

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR BBAARR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lightsand turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

The tools are in the tool box onthe right side of the trunk. Takethe tools out of the tool box.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Park the car on firm, level andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by pulling up on the handle.To keep the floor out of the way,hook the handle over the edge ofthe trunk opening.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire


TTRRUUNNKK FFLLOOOORR

SSPPAARREE TTIIRREE TTOOOOLL BBOOXX

HHAANNDDLLEEHHAANNDDLLEE

JJAACCKK

The car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

6. 7. 8.



296

WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH

JJAACCKK

△

CONTINUED

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.You could scratch the wheel if youput it face down.

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by a mark moldedinto the underside of the body.Place the jack under the jackingpoint. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

9. 10. 11.



EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

JJAACCKKIINNGG PPOOIINNTT

WWHHEEEELLWWRREENNCCHH

Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

12. 13. 14.



298

BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBB

CONTINUED

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

16.15. 17.

18.

19.



CCEENNTTEERR CCAAPP

WWIINNGG BBOOLLTT SSPPAACCEERR CCOONNEE

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Store the center cap in the trunk.Make sure it does not get scratch-ed or damaged.

Unhook the handle from the trunkopening and lower the floor lid.

Close the trunk lid.

20. 21.

22.

23.

Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start


If Your Engine Won’t Start

300

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor Neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page ).

303

320

259

303



Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

301

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

79

193

314

320

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing



If your car’s battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: climate control, stereosystem, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Remove the battery cover (seepage ).

You cannot start an Acura with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

1.

2.

3.259

259

CONTINUED

Jump Starting


A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

－＋

＋

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourAcura’s battery. Connect the otherend to the positive ( ) terminalon the booster battery.

5.4.

Jump Starting


PPrreemmiiuumm mmooddeell TTyyppee--SS

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until all aredisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

7.

8.

6.

Jump Starting


BBOOOOSSTTEERR BBAATTTTEERRYY

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the climate control and allother accessories. Turn on thehazard warning indicators.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

3.

If Your Engine Overheats


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

12.

11.320

183 320

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Overheats


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page ). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

1.

2.

3.

4.

181

239

320Emergency

Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe car stopped.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, climate control,rear defogger, cruise control, etc.Try not to use other electrically-operated controls such as the powerwindows. Keep the engine runningand take extra care not to stall it.Starting the engine will dischargethe battery rapidly.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

Charging System Indicator


CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the carchecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II) andgoes off after the engine starts. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates one of the engine’semissions control systems may havea problem. Even though you mayfeel no difference in your car’s per-formance, it can reduce your fueleconomy and cause your car to putout excessive emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedriving trips.

This indicator may also come onalong with the ‘‘D ’’ indicator.5

Malfunction Indicator Lamp



If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car’s emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car’s warranties.

Your car has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for astate emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. To check ifthey are set, turn the ignition ON (II),but do not start the engine. TheMalfunction Indicator Lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. See StateEmissions Testing on page .335

Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


＊＊

＊＊

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thisindicator, have the car inspected byyour dealer immediately.

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

252320

On Type-S with A/T

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator


UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

To remove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner, turn theplug by using a screwdriver orcoin, then pry it out. Make sure toalign the tabs on the round plug tothe notches on the ceilling asshown in the illustration.

1.

2.

3.4. 5.

6.

318

Closing the Moonroof


SSOOCCKKEETT

RROOUUNNDDPPLLUUGG

NNOOTTCCHH

TTAABB

All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in three fuse boxes.

The interior fuse boxes are locatedon each side of the dashboard. Toopen an interior fuse box, open thecar door. Pull the bottom of thecover open, then take it out of itsside hinges by pulling it toward you.

The VSA fuse box is located underthe interior fuse box on thepassenger’s side of the dashboard.To open it, push the tab and pull upthe left side of the cover as shown.

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the back of the engine compart-ment on the passenger’s side. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

On Type-S with A/T

Fuses


IINNTTEERRIIOORR

UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODDVVSSAA FFUUSSEE BBOOXX TTAABB

－

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.Remove the cover from the fuse

box.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

If something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

, or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

3.1.

2.

4.

317 319

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

FFUUSSEEPPUULLLLEERR

FFUUSSEE

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

5.

6.

157

Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

－

－

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

CONTINUED

Amps. Circuits ProtectedNo.No. Amps. Circuits Protected

20 A30 A

120 A30 A20 A15 A30 A15 A20 A20 A20 A

20 A

Cooling FanCooling FanBatterySpare FuseSpare FuseHazardABS MotorACG SStopABS F/S RelayRight HeadlightNot UsedLeft Headlight

13131415161718192021222324

112345

666789

101112

20 A30 A

7.5 A60 A40 A40 A20 A40 A

40 A40 A40 A15 A10 A

7.5 A

Condenser FanCondenser FanMG ClutchIG1 MainRear Window DefoggerHeater MotorTCSVSANot UsedPower SeatPower Window MotorBack Up, ACCSpare FuseSpare FuseSpare Fuse

1 :2 :3 :

Premium modelType-S with A/TType-S with M/T

1, 3

2

1

2

1

2

3

Fuses


UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

＊

＊

＊

－

－

←← →→

＊

＊＊

Circuits ProtectedAmps.No. Amps.No. Circuits Protected

Fuel PumpMain SRSHeater Control, A/C ClutchRelay, Cooling Fan RelayMirror, Heated Seat, HeatedMirrorDaytime Running LightsECU (PCM), Cruise Control,VSASide SRSACC Relay, NavigationInstrument Panel, Back-upLights, Memory SeatTurn SignalsIG CoilWiper, WasherStarter Signal

On Canadian models

15 A10 A

7.5 A

7.5 A

7.5 A15 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

7.5 A15 A30 A

7.5 A

123

4

56

789

10111213

On Canadian models

20 A20 A

20 A20 A

20 A20 A30 A20 A20 A10 A

7.5 A

20 A15 A

7.5 A

12

34

56789

10

11

1213141516

Left Power WindowDriver’s Power SeatReclining, Memory SeatHeated SeatDriver’s Power Seat Sliding,Memory Seat

Moonroof MotorRight Power WindowRadio, Power OutletNavigation System, DaytimeRunning LightsOnStarInterior Light, Seat Memory,HomeLinkPower Door LocksClock, Back Up, Small LightABS Motor CheckNot UsedNot Used

:

1 :2 : On cars with navigation system

Passenger’s Power Seat SlidingPassenger’s Power Seat Reclining

1

2

Fuses


FFrroonntt FFrroonntt

INTERIOR FUSE BOXES

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

－

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

123

20 A20 A

VSA F/S RelayVSA Throttle MotorNot Used

On Type-S with A/T

Fuses


VSA FUSE BOX

－

－

－

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car’s suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.

If your Acura cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If, due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following.

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D , then to N.Turn off the engine.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the car no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

5



Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the best way to transportyour Acura.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourAcura.

This method of towing isunacceptable.

Emergency Towing


Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your car must be transportedwith the f ront wheels of f the ground.

If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

Emergency Towing


Trying to lif t or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Acura, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 324................................Specifications . 326

DOT Tire Quality Grading.............................(U.S. Cars) . 328

.................................Treadwear . 328......................................Traction . 328

.............................Temperature . 329.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 330

......Driving in Foreign Countries . 331

.......................Emissions Controls . 332.....................The Clean Air Act . 332

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 332

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 332

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 332

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 333....................PGM-FI System . 333

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 333

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 333

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 333

....................Replacement Parts . 333..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 334

..............State Emissions Testing . 335

Technical Information

Technical Information 323

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourAcura dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver’s side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information324

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the frontleft.

Identif ication Numbers


EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊


Specifications

326

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

4.2 US qt (4.0 , 3.5 Imp qt)

192.0 in (4,877 mm)70.6 in (1,793 mm)53.3 in (1,354 mm)106.9 in (2,715 mm)61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.0 in (1,549 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)21.2 22.9 oz (600 650 g)

ND-OIL8

1.48 US gal (5.6 , 1.23 Imp gal)1.98 US gal (7.5 , 1.65 Imp gal)

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

5.3 US qt (5.0 , 4.4 Imp qt)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

3.1 US qt (2.9 , 2.6 Imp qt)7.6 US qt (7.2 , 6.3 Imp qt)

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:


Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidManualtransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir


1 :

2 :

Approx.

FrontRear

ChangeTotalChange

Including filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. CarsCanada Cars

17.17 US gal (65.0 , 14.30 Imp gal)1

2

－

＊＊

＊＊

－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊


Specifications

327

Engine

Tires

Alignment

Lights

Battery

Fuses

12 V12 V

60 W (HB3)24/2.2 CP

12 V12 V

27/8 W21/5 W

12 V 21/5 W

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6)

gasoline engine

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratio

Spark plugs

196 cu-in (3,210 cm )3.50 x 3.39 in (89.0 x 86.0 mm)

9.8 : 110.5 : 1

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure

Toe

Camber

Caster

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )T135/80R16 101MP215/50R17 93VP205/60R16 91V

2°50’0°30’0°

0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

Headlights (High beam)Front turn signal/parking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsStop/tail/side marker lightsHigh-mount brake lightFront side marker lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightGlove box light

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

21 W5 W21 W3 CP7 W5 W5 W2 CP1.1 W2 CP

Capacity 12 V 65 AH/20 HR

Interior

Under-hood

See pages 318 and 319 or the fuselabel attached to the inside of thefuse box door on each side of thedashboard.See page 317 or the fuse boxcover.

See spark plug maintenancesection page 258 .

FrontRearFrontRearFront

inLow beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube(D2R).

Front/Rear

SpareFront/RearSpare

1 :2 :

1 :2 :

Premium modelType-S

Premium modelType-S

1

1

1

2

1

2

－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Treadwear

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)


－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)


Temperature A, B, C

329

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

MTBE

ETHANOL

METHANOL

Oxygenated Fuels


If you are planning to take yourAcura outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Acura will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries


＊

＊

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

The burning of gasoline in your car’sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

Your car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine’scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive Crankcase

Ventilation valve routes them fromthe crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

230

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls


The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newGenuine Acura replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your car.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your car. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls


Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car’s three way catalyticconverter.

Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter


TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR

CONTINUED

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).


State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

335

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Acura dealer.

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 6th (M/T). Do notuse the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

5

State Emissions Testing


Customer Relations................................Information . 338

....................Warranty Coverages . 339Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 340.....................Authorized Manuals . 341

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 337

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraCustomer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel:(787) 250-4327

324

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations338

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel:1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax:Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Your new Acura is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from an Acura dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2003 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Acura’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2003 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 339

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Acura AutomobileDivision, American Honda Motor Co.,Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or AcuraAutomobile Division, AmericanHonda Motor Co., Inc.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

340

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－

＊２００３

ＡＣＵ

The following publications covering the operation andservicing of your vehicle can be obtained from HelmIncorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone numberon the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

341

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61S3M02

61S3M02EL

61S3M30

31S3M620

31S3M820

ACU-R

Form Description

2001 2003 Acura 3.2 CL

Service Manual

2001 2003 Acura 3.2 CL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2001 2003 Acura 3.2 CL

Body Repair Manual

2003 Acura 3.2 CL

Owner’s Manual

2003 Acura 3.2 CL

Navigation Manual

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$69.00

$47.00

$44.00

$37.00

$29.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

342

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 185................................Accessories . 185

.Additional Safety Precautions . 186............................Modifications . 186

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 81

............Accessory Power Sockets . 117....................Additives, Engine Oil . 240

.........................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 46, 48.....................Air Cleaner Element . 254

..............Air Conditioning System . 122..............................Maintenance . 264

.................................Usage . 124, 129.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 266

...........................Alarm, Anti-theft . 158.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 330

.......Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . 287......................................Antifreeze . 243

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 61, 208

...................................Operation . 207..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 157

Anti-theft Steering Column..............................................Lock . 81

..........................Anti-theft System . 158

..........................Appearance Care . 285............................................Armrest . 96

...............Audio Controls, Remote . 156................................Audio System . 135

Automatic Climate Control........................................System . 122

...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 71Automatic Seat Belt

...................................Tensioners . 44.............Automatic Speed Control . 159..............Automatic Transmission . 197

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 326...............Checking Fluid Level . 250

....Sequential SportShift Mode . 200.......................................Shifting . 198

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 197................Shift Lever Positions . 198

....................Shift Lock Release . 204

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 60, 309............................Jump Starting . 303

..............................Maintenance . 259............................Specifications . 327

..............................Before Driving . 177....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 43

...........................Beverage Holder . 111...................................Body Repair . 292

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 207

.............Break-in, New Linings . 178....................Bulb Replacement . 278

...........................................Fluid . 252.......................................Parking . 108

.................System Indicator . 60, 312........................Wear Indicators . 206

.............................Braking System . 206........................Break-in, New Car . 178

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 72........................Brights, Headlights . 70

Index

A

B

I

＊

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 278

..............................Brake Lights . 278........Front Side Marker Lights . 277

.................................Headlights . 275.........High-mount Brake Light . 279

...........................Interior Lights . 280...................License Plate Light . 280

............................Specifications . 327...............................Trunk Light . 282

....................Turn Signal Lights . 277..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 275

............................Capacities Chart . 326.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52

............................Carrying, Cargo . 187Cassette Player

............................................Care . 146...................................Operation . 142

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii...................................CD Changer . 147..................................Ceiling Light . 118

........................Certification Label . 324............................................Chains . 272

Changing Oil........................................How to . 241......................................When to . 230

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 295............Changing Engine Coolant . 245

...Charging System Indicator . 60, 309............Checklist, Before Driving . 192

.....................................Child Safety . 20.......................................Child Seats . 25

.........................................LATCH . 41..........Tether Anchorage Points . 40

....................Cleaner Element, Air . 254Cleaning

....................Aluminum Wheels . 287...................................Carpeting . 288

......................................Exterior . 286.........................................Fabric . 289.......................................Interior . 288.......................................Leather . 289

...................................Seat Belts . 289...........................................Vinyl . 289

....................................Windows . 290................................Wood Trim . 290

...............Climate Control System . 122.........................Clock, Setting the . 109

...............................Clutch System . 253

......................................Coat Hook . 115.....................Code, Audio System . 157

........................CO in the Exhaust . 332........................................Coin Box . 113

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 193..............................Compact Spare . 294

.................Console Compartment . 113.............................Console Pocket . 114

...............Consumer Information . 338.............Controls, Instruments and . 55

Coolant........................................Adding . 243

....................................Checking . 183.........................Proper Solution . 243

...................................Replacing . 245...................Temperature Gauge . 67

....................Corrosion Protection . 291............................Courtesy Lights . 119

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 332

............Cruise Control Operation . 159..........Customer Relations Office . 338

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii

Index

C

D

II

CONTINUED

...................................Dashboard . 2, 56................Daytime Running Lights . 71............Defects, Reporting Safety . 340

................Defogger, Rear Window . 75

......Defrosting the Windows . 128, 133....................................Dimensions . 326

...............Dimming the Headlights . 70Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 250..................................Engine Oil . 181

..........................Directional Signals . 72........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 206

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 242Doors

....................Lockout Prevention . 83..............................Monitor Light . 63

......................Power Door Locks . 82..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 328

.....................................Drive Belts . 265...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 191....................................Economy . 184

.........................In Bad Weather . 215................In Foreign Countries . 331

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 100

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 265

..............................Economy, Fuel . 184............Emergencies on the Road . 293.............Battery, Jump Starting . 303...........Brake System Indicator . 312

................Changing a Flat Tire . 295.....Charging System Indicator . 309

..................Checking the Fuses . 315.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 308...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 310...Manually Closing Moonroof . 313

..................Overheated Engine . 306.........................Emergency Brake . 108

......................Emergency Flashers . 75......................Emergency Towing . 320

............Emergency Trunk Opener . 89.......................Emissions Controls . 332

.............Emissions Testing, State . 335Engine

............................................Belts . 265....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 67

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 60, 310

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 308

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 239...............................Overheating . 306

............................Specifications . 327

....................Speed Limiter . 195, 203.......................................Starting . 193

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 330.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 332

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 52Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 333Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 286

..........................Fan, Interior . 126, 131Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 121....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 179

Index

E

F

III

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 275..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 75

Headlights........................................Aiming . 275

Automatic Lighting Off.....................................Feature . 71

............Daytime Running Lights . 72..................High Beam Indicator . 63

.........................Reminder Chime . 70........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 275

...................................Turning on . 70..............................Head Restraints . 95

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 193.................High-Low Beam Switch . 70..............High-mount Brake Light . 279

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 163

....................................Hood Latch . 254.......................Hood, Opening the . 180

..................................................Horn . 69.................................Hydroplaning . 216

Filters................................AIr Cleaner . 254

.........................Dust and pollen . 265...............................................Oil . 241

..............Flashers,Hazard Warning . 75...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 295

.....................................Floor Mats . 288Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 250..........................................Brake . 252.........................................Clutch . 253

..............Manual Transmission . 251..........................Power Steering . 253

................Windshield Washers . 249FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 140.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 331

..........................Four-way Flashers . 75..............................Front Airbags . 9, 46

.................................................Fuel . 178......................Fill Door and Cap . 179

...........................................Gauge . 67................Octane Requirement . 178

...............................Oxygenated . 330........................Reserve Indicator . 64

........................Tank, Filling the . 179

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 315

..........................................Gasohol . 330.........................................Gasoline . 178

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 64...........................................Gauge . 67

................Octane Requirement . 178........................Tank, Filling the . 179

................Gas Station Procedures . 179.............................................Gauges . 65

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 67...............................................Fuel . 67

Maintenance Required...................................Indicator . 68

...............................Speedometer . 65.................................Tachometer . 65

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight.......................................Rating) . 218

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 198..............................Glass Cleaning . 290

........................................Glove Box . 90GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 218

Index

G

H

IV

CONTINUED

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 324Ignition

..............................................Keys . 78...........................................Switch . 80

............Timing Control System . 333........................Immobilizer System . 79

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 57

...............................Infant Restraint . 29......................................Infant Seats . 30

.........................................LATCH . 41..........Tether Anchorage Points . 40

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 266...................................Inside Mirror . 98

.............................Inspection, Tire . 268............................Instrument Panel . 57

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 72...........................Interior Cleaning . 288

...............................Interior Lights . 118........................................Introduction . i

........................Jacking up the Car . 297

.......................................Jack, Tire . 295................................Jump Starting . 303

..................................................Keys . 78

.......................Label, Certification . 324.................Lane Change, Signaling . 72

..........................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 43.........................Leather, Cleaning . 289

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 275

........................................Ceiling . 118.....................................Courtesy . 119.......................................Indicator . 57

.........................................Parking . 70..................................Turn Signal . 72

.....................................Load Limit . 217......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 81

........................Lockout Prevention . 83Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 81............................Fuel Fill Door . 179

....................................Glove Box . 90.................................Power Door . 82

......Rear Console Compartment . 90...........................................Trunk . 87

........Trunk Pass-through Cover . 97........................Low Coolant Level . 183.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 64

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 308Lubricant Specifications

..........................................Chart . 326.........................................Luggage . 187

..................................Maintenance . 225...Owner Maintenance Checks . 237

.................................Record . 235-236......................Required Indicator . 68

..........................................Safety . 226.............................Schedule . 230-234

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 60, 310...................Manual Transmission . 194

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 251...........Memory, Driving Position . 100

Index

J

K

L

M

I

V

...............................Meters, Gauges . 65...................Methanol in Gasoline . 330

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 98.......................................Moonroof . 108

......................Closing Manually . 313...................................Operation . 108

...................Neutral Gear Position . 200..................New Vehicle Break-in . 178

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 324

..............................Paint Touch-up . 287..............Panel Brightness Control . 72

........................Park Gear Position . 199...........................................Parking . 205

...............................Parking Brake . 108Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 60, 312.................................Parking Lights . 70

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 334.............................PGM-FI System . 333

..................Polishing and Waxing . 287............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

............................Protecting Adults . 12...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18........................Protecting Children . 20.......................Protecting Infants . 29

.......Protecting Larger Children . 36.........Protecting Small Children . 32

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 40

.............................Using LATCH . 41

...................Radiator Overheating . 306Radio/Cassette/CD Sound

........................................System . 135...........................Readiness Codes . 311

..........Rear Console Compartment . 90..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 278

............................Rear Seat Access . 94..........................Rear Seat Armrest . 96

............................Rear View Mirror . 98.................Rear Window Defogger . 75...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 92

.............................Reminder Lights . 57.......................Remote Transmitter . 83

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 178.........................................Odometer . 66

...............................Odometer, Trip . 66Oil

........................Change, How to . 241......................Change, When to . 230......................Checking Engine . 181..............Pressure Indicator . 60, 308

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 240

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 81Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 332............................................OnStar . 168

..Operation in Foreign Countries . 331..............................Outside Mirrors . 98

....Outside Temperature Indicator . 67....................Overheating, Engine . 306

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 237.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 330

Index

O

P R

N

VI

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Replacement Information.................Air Cleaner Element . 254

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 265..........................Engine Coolant . 245

................Engine Oil and Filter . 241..........................................Fuses . 315

................................Light Bulbs . 275....................................Schedule . 228

................................Spark Plugs . 256...........................................Tires . 270

.............................Wiper Blades . 262Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 45...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 183

...............................Restraint, Child . 20..................Reverse Gear Position . 199

................................Rotation, Tire . 269

........................................Safety Belts . 8.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 340

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 10..........................Head Restraints . 10

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 53...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 43...............Additional Information . 43

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 44

.............Child Seat Anchor Plate . 40.....................................Cleaning . 289

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15, 43................................Maintenance . 45

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 43, 60

...................System Components . 43...............Use During Pregnancy . 18

..................................Seat Heaters . 103..................Seat Position Memory . 100

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 91............................Security System . 158

........Sequential SportShift Mode . 200...............................Serial Number . 324

...........................Service Intervals . 230

...........................Service Manual . 341.........Service Station Procedures . 179

..........................Setting the Clock . 109

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 197........................Shift Lock Release . 204

....................................Side Airbags . 48.........Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator . 50

Side Marker Lights, Bulb..............................Replacement . 277...............................Signaling Turns . 72

.....................................Snow Tires . 272...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 286

................................Sound System . 135Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 294............................Specifications . 327

................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 256....................Specifications Charts . 326

................................Speed Control . 159...................................Speedometer . 65

.......................................Spotlights . 118..........SRS, Additional Information . 46

...Additional Safety Precautions . 51..How the SRS Indicator Works . 49

.....How Your Airbags Work . 46, 48........................SRS Components . 46

..................................SRS Service . 51

Index

S

VII

.............................SRS Indicator . 49, 61....START (Ignition Key Position) . 81

.......................Starting the Engine . 193In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 193................With a Dead Battery . 303..............State Emissions Testing . 335

........Steam Coming from Engine . 306Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 76.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 81

...................Stereo Sound System . 135...........................Storing Your Car . 283

..................................Storage Tray . 115........................................Sun Visor . 116

........................Sunglasses Holder . 110Supplemental Restraint

..................................System . 9, 46

......................................Servicing . 51.........................SRS Indicator . 49, 61

...................System Components . 46..................................Synthetic Oil . 240

.....................................Tachometer . 65

..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 278.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 293

....................................Tape Player . 142Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 328.....Emissions Control Systems . 332

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 330Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 334.......................Temperature Gauge . 67

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 41............................Theft Protection . 157

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 334..........................Time, Setting the . 109

....................................Timing Belt . 266

....................................Tire Chains . 272.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 295

...............................................Tires . 266..............................Air Pressure . 266

.........................Checking Wear . 268..........................Compact Spare . 294

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 328......................................Inflation . 266

..................................Inspection . 268...................................Replacing . 270

......................................Rotating . 269

...........................................Snow . 272............................Specifications . 327

.......................Traction Devices . 272..........................Winter Driving . 271

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 295Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 217................Emergency Wrecker . 320

Traction Control System (TCS)...............................Indicator . 62, 209

...................................Operation . 209...........................Traction Devices . 272

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 250...................................Manual . 251

..................Fluid Selection . 250, 251..............Identification Number . 324.............Shifting the Automatic . 197

..................Shifting the Manual . 194.....................................Treadwear . 328.......................................Trip Meter . 66

................................................Trunk . 87........Emergency Trunk Opener . 89

.................................Opening the . 87...................Open Monitor Light . 63

Index

T

VIII

＊

＊

....................................Turn Signals . 72

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 291Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 293....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 328

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 178.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 288

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 242

................................Vanity Mirror . 116.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 188

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 326....Vehicle Identification Number . 324

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 212

........VSA System Indicator . 62, 213...VSA Activation Indicator . 62, 212

.........................VSA Off Switch . 213.............................Vehicle Storage . 283

.....................................Ventilation . 122.................................................VIN . 324

...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 289..................................Viscosity, Oil . 240

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 53

..................Warranty Coverages . 339Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 249.......................................Indicator . 64.....................................Operation . 74

.........................................Washing . 286..................Waxing and Polishing . 287

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 76............Alignment and Balance . 270

......Cleaning Aluminum Alloys . 287..........................Compact Spare . 294

Windows.....................................Cleaning . 290

................Operating the Power . 104...........................Rear, Defogger . 75

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 73...........................Defroster . 128, 133

.......................................Washers . 74Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 262.....................................Operation . 73

....................................Wood Trim . 290

....................................Worn Tires . 268.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 320

U.S. and Canada only

Index

WU

V

IX

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

6-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

Front/Rear:32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Capacity:

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

2.3 US qt (2.2 , 1.9 Imp qt)

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

239

250

253

252

25117.17 US gal (65.0 , 14.30 Imp gal)

2003 CL Online Reference Owner's Manual...

Documents

Transcript of 2003 CL Online Reference Owner's Manual...